JP4777271B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display device having a plurality of variable display portions capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and when a combination of identification information is a specific display result as a display result of variable display The present invention relates to a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific game state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit game state), or a state in which a right to become advantageous for a player In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In addition, if a special condition such as a display result of variable display of identification information becomes a special specific display result (special display result) of the specific display results in the variable display device, the jackpot is subsequently obtained. Some are configured to shift to a high-probability state (also referred to as a probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the occurrence is high.

  In Patent Document 1 below, in the middle of variable display of symbols, a special combination of symbols called reach eyes is stopped and displayed on the variable display device, so that a big hit can be expected and the interest of the game is improved. A gaming machine is disclosed. In this gaming machine, there are cases where the reach eye develops to a big hit after being temporarily stopped, and when the reach eye finally stops and comes off, and when the predetermined condition that the reach eye finally stops is satisfied The reach is determined to be the final stop symbol regardless of the off symbol random number.

JP-A-11-299995 (paragraphs 0038, 0054-0082, 0110, FIGS. 13 to 19)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, one control device executes all controls including game control (control of the progress of the game) and display control (control of the display state of the variable display device). The control burden of the control device is large, and there is a possibility that various effects cannot be performed when performing effects using reach eyes (in this application, chance chances, special display results).

  Therefore, the present invention separately provides a game control means for executing game control and a display control means for executing display control, and provides various effects using special display results without increasing the control burden of the game control means. An object is to provide a gaming machine that can be executed.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a plurality of variable display portions (for example, left, middle, and right display areas) that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information (for example, left, middle, and right decorative symbols) that can each be identified. This is advantageous for the player when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) of a specific combination among the combinations of identification information is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the display is shifted to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) and a special display result of a specific combination of the specific display results is derived and displayed as a variable display result, the normal state is reached after the specific game state has ended. union of the variable display display result as a combination of identification information is shifted to the special game state tends to particular display result of the identification information that do not reach than when Also derived Displays if the special display results in a shift to grantable special gaming state less game value than JP Teiyugi state to the player when viewing derive special display results of special combinations of allowed There is a case of not shifted to special game state regardless, when the process proceeds to special game state gaming machine to transition to the special gaming state after the special gaming state has ended (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) met Game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the display state of the variable display device. means, determined on the derived display the previous display results whether or not to shift to the special game state and whether or not to shift to the special game state whether or not to shift to the specific game state Pre-determining means (for example, a part of step S58 in the game control microcomputer 560) and variable display pattern determining means (for example, game control) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern) of variable display of identification information Portion for executing steps S201 to S212 in the microcomputer 560, and a determination command (for example, variation pattern command, symbol information designation command) that can specify the determination result of the determination unit and the determination result of the variable display pattern determination unit ) For transmitting a predetermined command (for example, a part for executing control for transmitting a variation pattern command and a symbol information designation command in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28) in the game control microcomputer 560); Including and directing The control means executes numerical value update means (for example, step S706 in the production control microcomputer 100) for updating the numerical values of a plurality of types of identification information random numbers (for example, the left symbol determination random number) for determining the combination of identification information. And a numerical value extraction means (for example, steps S1001, S1003, S1006, S1000B, S1011, S1020, S1023, S1031 in the production control microcomputer 100) that extract the numerical value of the identification information random number from the numerical value update means at a predetermined time. , S1040, S1043, S1071, S1081, S1101, S1113, S1116, 1130, S1131, S1140, S1143, S1161, S681, and S691), and a variable display device based on a predetermined command. Identification information determining means for determining a combination of identification information derived and displayed as a display result on a plurality of variable display sections from among a plurality of types using numerical values of identification information random numbers extracted by the numerical value extracting means (for example, effect control) When the variable display pattern determining means decides not to shift to the specific gaming state and the special gaming state by the predetermining means, the reach is executed. Reach variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern of variation numbers 5 to 41) for deriving and displaying a combination of identification information (for example, reach losing appearance, reach loss design) at the end of variable display, and a combination of identification information that does not become reach Special display results of a special combination (for example, chance ) Is derived and displayed at the end of the variable display except for the special display result among the combinations of the first special variable display pattern (for example, the variation pattern of the variation numbers 3 and 4) that is derived and displayed at the end of the variable display and the identification information that does not reach. A variable display pattern is determined from among a plurality of variable display patterns including a non-reach variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern with variation numbers 1 and 2) to be performed (for example, steps S211, S212, and S207 are executed) and determined in advance. When it is determined by the means to shift to the special gaming state, a plurality of variable display patterns including a first special variable display pattern for deriving and displaying a special display result at the end of the variable display among combinations of identification information that does not reach reach. When a variable display pattern is determined from the inside, and it is determined to shift to a specific gaming state by a pre-determining means A plurality of variable display patterns including a second special variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern of variation numbers 63, 64, and 100) for deriving and displaying the specific display result after temporarily displaying the special display result in the middle of variable display. The variable display pattern is determined from the inside (for example, Steps S205, S206, and S207 are executed), and the identification information determining unit is a command that can identify the non-reach variable display pattern (for example, Step S1000A). N), a combination of identification information to be derived and displayed as a display result is determined using a specific random number (for example, a left symbol determining random number, a right symbol determining random number, a middle symbol determining random number) among the identification information random numbers ( For example, steps S1001 to S1008 are executed), and the predetermined command is a command that can specify the first special variable display pattern. Lever (e.g., Y in step S1000A), without using a specific random number among the identification information random number, a combination of identification information deriving displayed as a display result determined in special display result (e.g., step S1000B, the S1000C The predetermined command transmission unit executes a variable display command transmission unit that transmits a variable display command that can specify the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit, and a display result that indicates a determination result by the predetermined determination unit. A display result command transmitting means for transmitting a command, and the variable display command transmitting means is capable of specifying a variable display pattern for displaying a non-specific display result indicating that control is not performed in a specific gaming state as a variable display command. Variable display command, variable display pattern to display special display results Special variable display command that can be specified, non-special display result that can specify a variable display pattern that can display a non-special display result that is a specific display result but not a special display result, a special display result, or a non-special display result When one of the specific variable display commands that can identify the common variable display pattern is transmitted and the identification information determining means receives the non-specific variable display command, special variable display command, or non-special variable display command, the display result Regardless of whether the command is received or not, the identification information is determined based on the received variable display command, the specific variable display command is received, and when the display result command is received, the received display result command is used. To determine the identification information that will be the special display result or non-special display result and receive the display result command When is characterized in that provisionally determines the identification information as a non-special display result.

The gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a variable display device having a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information arranged in a predetermined order so that each can be identified. Multiple effective lines that can be used to derive and display combinations of information are specified in advance, and a specific display that is advantageous for the player when a specific display result of a specific combination of the combinations of identification information is derived and displayed as a variable display result Compared to the normal state after the specific gaming state has ended when the special display result of the special combination of the specific display results is derived and displayed on the active line as the display result of the variable display after shifting to the gaming state a game machine of Symbols as a display result of the variable display Ru is shifted to the special game state tends to particular display result, the game And game control means for controlling the rows, and presentation control means for controlling the display state of the variable display device includes a game control unit determines whether to shift to the special game state and whether or not to shift to the specific game state Predetermining means for determining the display result before derivation display, variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display of the identification information, the determination result of the predetermining means and the determination result of the variable display pattern determining means, A predetermining command transmitting means for transmitting a predetermining command capable of specifying the information, and the production control means includes a numerical value updating means for updating numerical values of a plurality of types of identification information random numbers for determining a combination of identification information, Numeric value extracting means for extracting the numerical value of the identification information random number from the numerical value updating means at a predetermined time, and a plurality of variable display units in the variable display device based on a predetermined command A combination of identification information to be derived and displayed as a display result, identification information determination means for determining from among a plurality of types using a numerical value of identification information random numbers extracted by the numerical value extraction means, the variable display pattern determination means, When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the game state is not shifted to the specific gaming state, a special combination of a reach variable display pattern for deriving and displaying a combination of identification information to be reached at the end of variable display and a combination of identification information not to be reached A first special variable display pattern for deriving and displaying the special display result of the combination at the end of the variable display; and a non-reach variable display pattern for deriving and displaying at the end of the variable display other than the special display result among combinations of identification information that do not reach A variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including When it is determined to shift to the specific gaming state, the special display result is temporarily stopped during the variable display, and then the specific display result is derived and displayed, including the second special variable display pattern. The variable display pattern is determined from the identification information determining means so that the combination of identification information does not result in a special display result in a plurality of effective lines if the predetermined command is a command that can specify a non-reach variable display pattern. A combination of identification information derived and displayed as a display result using a specific random number of identification information random numbers is determined, and if the predetermined command is a command that can specify a reach variable display pattern, a plurality of effective lines In order to prevent a combination of identification information from being displayed as a special display result on an active line other than a specific active line, If the combination of identification information to be derived and displayed as a display result is determined, and the predetermined command is a command that can specify the first special variable display pattern, a specific random number among the identification information random numbers is not used. The combination of identification information to be derived and displayed as a display result is determined as a special display result, and the predetermined command transmission means transmits a variable display command capable of specifying the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A command transmission means and a display result command transmission means for transmitting a display result command indicating a result of determination by the pre-decision means, and the variable display command transmission means is a non-indicating that the variable display command is not controlled to a specific gaming state. Non-specific variable display command that can specify a variable display pattern for displaying specific display results Special variable display command that can specify a variable display pattern that displays a special display result, Non-special variable display command that can specify a variable display pattern that displays a non-special display result that is a specific display result but not a special display result, Special Either a specific variable display command that can specify a common variable display pattern for displaying a display result or a non-special display result is transmitted, and the identification information determining means is a non-specific variable display command, a special variable display command, or a non-special variable. When a display command is received, regardless of whether or not a display result command is received, identification information is determined based on the received variable display command, a specific variable display command is received, and a display result command is received Is identification information that becomes a special display result or a non-special display result based on the received display result command When the display result command cannot be received, the identification information that becomes the non-special display result is provisionally determined .
If the predetermined command is a command that can identify the first special variable display pattern, the effect control means executes a specific effect (for example, dummy effect) after deriving and displaying the special display result (for example, variation number 3, In accordance with the variation pattern effect determined in step S813 based on the variation pattern No. 4, control of the effect device is executed in step S834 to execute a dummy effect).

A plurality of types of second special variable display patterns are provided (for example, variation patterns 63, 64, 84 to 86, 100, 113, and 114 are provided), and the production control means uses any second predetermined command. Different special display results (for example, chance eyes A and B) depending on the special variable display pattern are temporarily stopped during variable display (for example, in the case of the variation patterns of the variation numbers 63, 64 and 100, the chance eye A is displayed. The chance eye B may be stopped in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 84 to 86, 113, and 114) .

In the first aspect of the present invention, a game control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the display state of the variable display device are provided, and the game control means (variable display pattern determining means) is specified. A combination of reach variable display pattern for deriving and displaying the combination of identification information to reach when the game state and special game state are not transferred, and a combination of identification information not to reach when shifting to the special game state. The variable display pattern is determined from among a plurality of variable display patterns including the first special variable display pattern for deriving and displaying the special display result at the end of the variable display. The first special variable display pattern that derives and displays the special display result (chance) at the end of variable display, and reach When a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a non-reach variable display pattern that is derived and displayed at the end of variable display among combinations of identification information that are not included, and transition to a specific gaming state Determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a second special variable display pattern for deriving and displaying the specific display result after temporarily displaying the special display result in the middle of the variable display; If the received identification command is a command that can specify a non-reach variable display pattern, the combination of identification information derived and displayed as a display result using a specific random number among the identification information random numbers If the received predetermined command is a command that can specify the first special variable display pattern, the identification information random number is used. Without using a specific random number, a combination of identification information deriving displayed as a display result determined in special display results, prior determination command transmitting unit, capable of specifying a variable display pattern decided by the variable display pattern determining means A variable display command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display command; and a display result command transmitting means for transmitting a display result command indicating a result of determination by the predetermining means. The variable display command transmitting means is a specific game as a variable display command. The non-specific variable display command that can specify the variable display pattern that displays the non-specific display result indicating that the state is not controlled, the special variable display command that can specify the variable display pattern that displays the special display result, and the specific display result A variable display pattern that displays non-special display results that are not special display results Non-special variable display command that can be specified, specific display command that can specify a common variable display pattern that displays special display result or non-special display result, and identification information determination means is non-specific variable display When a command, special variable display command, or non-special variable display command is received, the identification information is determined based on the received variable display command regardless of whether the display result command is received, and the specific variable display command is When the display result command is received, the identification information that becomes the special display result or the non-special display result is determined based on the received display result command, and when the display result command cannot be received, the non-special display result command is received. which is configured to provisionally determine the identity to be displayed result, without increasing the control load of the game control means It is possible to perform a variety of effect using the special display results. In addition, since it is possible to specify whether or not the special display result is finally stopped (displayed at the end of variable display) by a predetermined command, it is possible to perform an effect using the special display result without increasing the number of commands. it can.

In the invention described in claim 3 , the effect control means is configured to execute the specific effect after the special display result is derived and displayed if the predetermined command is a command capable of specifying the first special variable display pattern. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved when the special display result is derived and displayed.

In the fourth aspect of the present invention, a plurality of types of second special variable display patterns are provided, and the effect control means variably displays special display results that differ depending on which second special variable display pattern is the predetermined command. Since it is configured to display a temporary stop at, the relationship between the special display result and the reach effect that develops thereafter (the effect from when the special display result is displayed until the specific display result is displayed) As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding game boards described later). Is a structure including

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7 variably displayed and displayed a plurality of types of decorative patterns for presentation that can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, the hitting of the hit ball at the start winning opening 14). A variable display device 9 for deriving and displaying the result is arranged. In this embodiment, the variable display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and the decorative symbols are arranged in the vertical direction (in this embodiment, in the left, middle and right display regions (decorative symbol display areas)). , From top to bottom) is variably displayed. In the display areas of the left, middle, and right columns, three consecutive frames of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed when variable display of decorative symbols is stopped (see FIG. 3 and the like).

  Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means that the symbols are stopped and displayed (except for the temporary stop before the so-called super reach development, the temporary stop before executing the re-lottery effect, and the temporary stop before executing the relief effect). .

  In this embodiment, as the decorative symbols displayed in the three display areas of the variable display device 9, as shown in FIG. 2, a number symbol “1” to “8” and a blank between the number symbols are used. The symbol “*” shown is used. During variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols, as a rule, the left display area displays "8", "*", "7" ... "*" decorative symbols in numerical order, and the middle and right display areas , “1”, “*”, “2”... “*” Are displayed in numerical order. Note that the decorative symbol displayed in the left display area is called “left symbol”, the decorative symbol displayed in the middle display region is called “middle symbol”, and the decorative symbol displayed in the right display region is “ It is sometimes called “right design”.

  A special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers “0” to “9”, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to variably display more types of numbers such as “0” to “99” in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol.

  The variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. The special symbol display 8 that performs variable display of the special symbols is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board.

  At the bottom of the variable display device 9, a special symbol hold memory display comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). 18 is provided. Every time there is an effective start prize, the display color of one display is changed. Each time the variable display on the special symbol display 8 is started, the display color of one display is restored. In this example, since the special symbol display 8 and the special symbol hold memory display 18 are provided separately, the number of hold memories can be displayed even during variable display. In the display area of the variable display device 9, a special symbol reserved storage display area including four display areas for displaying the number of reserved memories may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is 4, but the upper limit value may be a larger value. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Below the variable display device 9, there is provided a start winning opening 14 through which a game ball can be won. The game ball won in the start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a. The start winning opening 14 is provided with a variable winning ball device 15 that performs an opening / closing operation. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16 (not shown in FIG. 1). When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 (easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player.

  A special variable winning device that is opened by the solenoid 21 in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is provided below the start winning opening 14. The special variable winning device includes an opening / closing plate 20 and forms a big winning opening. The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided directly above the variable display device 9. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When a game ball wins the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the left and right lamps (a symbol can be visually recognized when the lamp is lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit when the variable display ends, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to a player's advantageous state when the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing to the gate 32, the normal symbol hold memory display 41 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39, and winning of game balls to the winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 is performed by winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, respectively. Detected. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game balls and allowing winning. The start winning opening 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game balls and allows winning. A decorative lamp 25 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  Also, below the left speaker 27 is provided a prize ball LED 51 that is lit while paying out the prize ball, and below the right speaker 27 is provided a ball cut LED 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut. Yes. Further, a prepaid card unit that enables lending of a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). In addition, a status indicator for notifying the player of a gaming state inside the gaming machine (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, and a short time state, which will be described later) is provided at a predetermined location on the gaming board 6 (not shown). ).

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. If the game ball enters the start winning opening 14 and is detected by the start opening switch 14a, the special symbol display device is in a state in which the variable symbol special display can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the end of the previous variable display). 8, variable display (variation) of the special symbol is started, and variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the variable display device 9. If the variable symbol special display cannot be started, the reserved memory number for the special symbol storage memory display 18 is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol of the variable display device 9 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the stop symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a probable variation symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later) or a non-probability variation symbol of the big hit symbol, it shifts to a big hit gaming state (probable big hit or non-probable big hit (also called normal big hit)). . That is, the special variable prize-winning device is opened until a certain time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big prize opening. It should be noted that one round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning device is opened until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins the big winning opening. In this embodiment, when the stop symbol is changed to the jackpot gaming state based on the probability variation symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later) or the non-probability variation symbol, the jackpot gaming state is continued for 15 rounds. The

  In addition, when the stop symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a special probability variation symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sudden probability variation symbol), a special jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “suddenly sudden”) that makes the player recognize that the gaming state has suddenly shifted to the certain probability variation state It is called probable big hit.) In the case of sudden probability big hit, the special variable winning device is opened twice for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In the sudden probability change big hit, it is one round from when the special variable winning device is opened until it is closed, and the gaming state of the sudden probability change big hit is continued for two rounds. It should be noted that, in the sudden odds big win, the period during which the special variable winning device is opened is short, and ten game balls do not win while the special variable winning device is opened. Need not be defined as one round. When a sudden odd jackpot occurs, unlike in the case of 15 round jackpots, the effects of each round do not proceed in sequence on the variable display device 9, but the game state suddenly shifts to the probable state. A special performance is performed to show the person.

  Further, when the stop symbol at the time of the stop becomes a small hit symbol, the game shifts to a small hit game state in which the game value given to the player is smaller than the big hit game state. That is, it shifts to a gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened twice only for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In this way, in the small hit game state, the same game value as the game value given to the player when a sudden probability change big hit occurs is given. However, unlike the case of sudden probability change big hit, the gaming state is not shifted to the probability changing state after the small hit gaming state ends. From this, the player expects the occurrence of a probable big hit suddenly rather than the small hit. Even when a small hit occurs, a special effect similar to that at the time of sudden big odd hit is executed. Such a special effect is called a two-round effect. As for the effects for two rounds, there are two special effects, one that is executed when a sudden odd-change big hit occurs, and the other is a combination of sudden and small hits that is executed when either a sudden big change or small hit occurs suddenly. is there.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 are synchronized. Here, the synchronization means that the variable display period (variable display time) is the same. In addition, the display result on the special symbol display 8 (a special symbol stop symbol) corresponds to the display result on the variable display device 9 (decorative symbol stop symbol). The correspondence between the two symbols will be described later.

  Next, the type of gaming state and the transition of gaming state will be described.

  The probability variation state (probability variation state) refers to a gaming state that is advantageous to a player who has a higher probability of making a big hit (that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol) than the normal gaming state and the short-time state. In this embodiment, the term “probability change state” does not include a short time state of probability change described later unless explicitly stated.

  The time-short state (time shortening state) is a gaming state in which the variable symbol display time (variation time) of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 is shorter than the normal gaming state and the probability variation state. I mean. By shortening the variable display time in this way, the variable display of symbols is frequently executed, and the probability of jackpot per unit time is improved, resulting in an advantageous state for the player. In the short time state, in the normal symbol display 10, the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the probability variation state, and one of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball device 15 or Both are higher than the normal gaming state and the probability variation state, and become a more advantageous state for the player. In the short time state, the variable symbol display time (variation time) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is shorter than that of the normal game state and the probability change state. In this embodiment, the term “short-time state” does not include a short-term state of probability change described later unless explicitly stated.

  The probability change short state means a game state that is a probability change state and a time short state. The probabilistic short time state is a very advantageous state for the player.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state transitions as follows.

(1) When the normal game state and the short-time state, the probability change symbol (excluding the sudden probability variation symbol) will be a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, the gaming state is changed from the normal game state and the short-time state to the probability change time-short state . As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased.

(2) When the probability variation state and the probability variation time short state, the probability variation symbol (excluding sudden probability variation symbol) will be a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, if the game state is the probability variation state, it will shift to the probability variation time short state, When the gaming state is the short state at the time of probability change, the short state at the time of probability change is maintained without changing. As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased.

(3) When the normal game state and the short-time state suddenly become a big hit with a probable change symbol, and when the big hit game is completed, the game state is shifted from the normal game state and the short-time state to a positive change state. At this time, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, but the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is not increased, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not shortened, and a variable prize is awarded. The opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 cannot be increased. It should be noted that after the sudden change game is suddenly ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the certainty state.

(4) When the probability change state and the probability change time short state suddenly hit a big win with the probability change symbol, and when the big hit game is finished, if the game state is the probability change state, the probability change state is continued without changing, and the game state is definitely changed. When it is in the short-time state, the state is shifted to the probability variation state. At this time, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, but the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is not increased, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not shortened, and a variable prize is awarded. The opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 cannot be increased. In addition, after the sudden probability big hit game is ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the probability variation state.

(5) In the normal game state and the short-time state, a big hit is made with a non-probable variation pattern, and when the big-hit game ends, the time-short state is controlled by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the transition from the normal gaming state to the short-time state is made a predetermined number of times of variation, and when the gaming state is the short-time state, the short-time state is continued for a predetermined number of times of variation. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. Then, when the change of the predetermined number of changes is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal gaming state.

(6) When the probability change state and the probability change time short state, a big hit is made with a non-probability variation symbol, and when the big hit game is ended, the time is controlled to a short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit ends. In other words, the state is shifted from the probability variation state and the probability variation short time state to the short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. Then, when the change of the predetermined number of changes is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal gaming state.

(7) In the normal gaming state and the probability changing state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hitting game ends, the normal gaming state and the probability changing state are continued without changing. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be shifted to the certain change state.

(8) When the time-short state and the probability change time short state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit game ends, the time-short state and the probability change time short state are continued without change. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be shifted to the certain change state.

  The transition of the gaming state as described above is an example, and the present invention is not limited to such a configuration.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of reach symbols. As shown in FIG. 3, the variable display device 9 is divided into left, middle and right display areas. In the display area of each column, three consecutive frames of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the decorative display of 3 rows × 3 columns (= 9 symbols) is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 and is visually recognized by the player.

  In the variable display device 9, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols (except for the symbol “*”) derived and displayed thereafter is displayed on the active line. When you have the same design, you win a big hit. In this embodiment, five lines of “upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “lower right” and “upward right” are provided as effective lines.

  In this embodiment, reach is established when the left symbol and the right symbol (excluding the symbol “*”) are aligned on the same effective line. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, when the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned with the same symbol “1” in the upper line (“1UH”), the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol “1” in the lower line. When aligned (“1LH”), when the left symbol and right symbol are aligned with the same symbol “1” in the middle line (“1CH”), when the left symbol and right symbol are double lines (lower right and up right) When the same symbols “1” and “8” are arranged (“1WH”), reach is established.

  The symbols (1UH, 1LH, etc.) attached to each reach symbol indicate the symbol (“1”, “2”, “3”...), And the second digit indicates a line (“upper row”). ”,“ Middle stage ”,“ lower stage ”,“ double line ”), and the first digit“ H ”indicates a state of“ Hazure ”. In the second-digit line display, “U” is an abbreviation for “upper” Upper, “C” is an abbreviation for “middle” Center, “L” is an abbreviation for “lower” Lower, “W” indicates “double line”. For example, “7CH” means that the symbol is “7”, “middle line”, and “out”.

  In this embodiment, when reach is established, an effect different from normal is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the variable display device 9 are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (decoration design etc.)) or a background display mode (for example, color) of the variable display device 9 is displayed. May be changed.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the stop symbol of the special symbol and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the outlier symbol of both symbols, the probability variation symbol, the non-probability variation symbol, the sudden probability variation symbol, and the small hit symbol symbol) will be described.

(1) Special design stop design:
As described above, the special symbols variably displayed on the special symbol display 8 are “0” to “9”. Among these, “0” to “3”, “8”, “9” are outliers, “7” is a probability variable symbol, “6” is a non-probability variable symbol, and “5” is a sudden probability variable symbol. “4” is a small hit symbol.

(2) Decorative design stop design:
As described above, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the symbols “1”, “*”, “2”, and “*”, respectively.

(2-1) A decorative pattern is a pattern in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is not aligned on the same effective line (for example, “358”, “145”, etc. (Excluding suddenly probabilistic symbols and small hit symbols). In addition, although the left and right decorative symbols are aligned on the effective line in the same pattern (although it is a reach), the state in which only the decorative symbols in the middle are not aligned on the effective line is also an outlier. In this embodiment, the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are not aligned on the same effective pattern on all active lines is referred to as a “split eye”, and the left and right decorative symbols are on the active line. The symbols that are arranged in the same pattern but are not arranged on the effective line are called “reach loses” or “reach missed symbols”.

(2-2) A big hit symbol of a decorative symbol is a symbol in a state in which a combination of left, middle and right decorative symbols is aligned on the same effective line on a predetermined effective line. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of jackpot symbols. As shown in FIG. 4, the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols (excluding the symbol “*”) is aligned with the same symbol on the active line. For example, as shown in FIG. 4, when a combination of left, middle and right decorative symbols is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the upper line (“1UF”), the left middle right decorative symbol combination is in the lower line. When the same symbol “1” is aligned (“1LF”), the combination of the left middle right decorative symbol is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the middle line (“1CF”), the left middle right decorative symbol When the combination is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the line with the lower right (“1SF”), when the combination of the left and right decorative symbols is aligned with the same symbol “1” with the line with the upper right (“1AF”) ), A big hit.

  The symbol (1UF, 1LF, etc.) attached to each jackpot symbol is the third digit indicating the symbol (“1”, “2”, “3”...), And the second digit is a line display (“upper row” ”,“ Middle stage ”,“ lower stage ”,“ lower right ”,“ upward right ”), and the first digit“ F ”indicates a“ big hit ”(Fever) state. In the second-digit line display, “U” is an abbreviation for “upper” Upper, “C” is an abbreviation for “middle” Center, “L” is an abbreviation for “lower” Lower, “S” is an acronym for “downward right” SAGARI, and “A” is an acronym for “upward right” AGARI. For example, “7AF” means that the symbol is “7”, “rising line to the right”, and “big hit”.

  Among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 4, there is a symbol in a state in which the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is aligned with a specific symbol (“1” “3” “5” “7” “8”) on the active line. It is a probable variation. Specifically, in FIG. 4, “1UF” “1LF” “1CF” “1SF” “1AF”, “3UF” “3LF” “3CF” “3SF” “3AF”, “5UF” “5LF” “5CF” The symbols “5SF”, “5AF”, “7UF”, “7LF”, “7CF”, “7SF”, “7AF”, “8UF”, “8LF”, “8CF”, “8SF”, and “8AF” are probabilistic symbols. In addition, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 4, the symbols in the state in which the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols are arranged on the active line with symbols other than the specific symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”) are not. It is a probable variation. Specifically, in FIG. 4, “2UF” “2LF” “2CF” “2SF” “2AF”, “4UF” “4LF” “4CF” “4SF” “4AF”, “6UF” “6LF” “6CF” The symbols “6SF” and “6AF” are non-probable variations.

  In this embodiment, when the lottery effect after the big hit is performed, the stop symbol derived and displayed when the change is stopped does not correspond to the special symbol and the decorative symbol. For example, even if the stop symbol of the special symbol derived and displayed at the time of the fluctuation stop is the probability variation symbol “7”, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol derived and displayed at the time of the fluctuation stop when executing the re-lottery effect after the big hit Becomes an uncertain variable (such as “2UF”). In this case, the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the ornament symbol in the re-lottery effect after the big hit.

(2-3) In this embodiment, in order to notify the player that there is a high probability of being a big hit or a big hit, there is a decorative pattern in the middle left and right in the middle of the variation of the decorative design. The special combination is stopped and displayed, and after that, the effect of developing into super reach and the like is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, a special combination of decorative patterns on the left, middle and right is stopped when normal fluctuations are stopped, and after that, even if it is not developed to super reach, the effect that makes it appear to develop to super reach ( An effect that is likely to develop into a super reach but does not develop; hereinafter referred to as a dummy effect (see FIG. 85). Such a special combination of left, middle, and right decorative patterns is called a chance for production. In this embodiment, a chance eye A and a chance eye B are provided as chance eyes in the production.

  As shown in FIG. 5, as the chance item A, 36 types of chance items (“1C” to 4C ”,“ 9C ”to“ 12C ”,“ 17C ”to“ 20C ”,“ 25C ”to“ 28C ”,“ 33C "to" 36C "," 41C "to" 44C "," 49C "to" 52C "," 57C "to" 60C "," 65C "to" 68C "). Further, as shown in FIG. 6, as the chance item B, 36 types of chance items (“5C” to “8C”, “13C” to “16C”, “21C” to “24C”, “29C” to “32C”). ”,“ 37C ”to“ 40C ”,“ 45C ”to“ 48C ”,“ 53C ”to“ 56C ”,“ 61C ”to“ 64C ”,“ 69C ”to“ 72C ”). The symbol (C) attached to each chance is an abbreviation of “Chance”.

  When the chance item A on the effect shown in FIG. 5 is stopped and displayed, a dummy effect that is developed to super reach B or is likely to develop to super reach but is not developed is executed. In addition, when the chance chance B in the production shown in FIG. 6 is stopped and displayed, it subsequently develops to super reach D. Therefore, the player expects a big hit when the chance items A and B (particularly, the chance item B) are stopped and displayed.

  Even if the chance item A or B is not determined to be stopped, it may happen that when the missing symbol is determined, the determined missing symbol accidentally becomes the chance item A or the chance item B. In this case, even if the chance item A or B is stopped and displayed, if the production that develops into the super reach and the dummy production that seems to develop into the super reach are not executed, the expectation for the chance eyes is lowered and the entertainment of the game Will fall. In order to avoid such a situation, in this embodiment, a control is executed to prohibit the same symbol as the chance eye A or chance eye B from being derived and displayed as a symbol.

(2-4) Suddenly probabilistic symbols of decorative symbols are specific symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “8”) in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is different on the middle line. It is a symbol in a state stopped and displayed at. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, 10 kinds of symbols (designs surrounded by a thick frame: “73C” “78C” “113C” “118C” “123C” “128C” “ 133C "," 138C "," 143C "," 148C "). Specifically, “135” “571” “185” “318” “387” “578” “753” “783” “835” “873” is stopped and displayed suddenly on the middle line. It is a probable variation. In addition, the suddenly probable pattern is also called a chance chance for sudden use.

  The sudden probability variation symbol is a kind of jackpot symbol, but it is desirable not to easily recognize the occurrence of the jackpot by the sudden probability variation symbol in order to make it appear that it has suddenly shifted to the probability variation state. For this reason, as described above, the suddenly probable symbols are different from the other jackpot symbols.

  When a missing symbol is determined, it may happen that the determined missing symbol suddenly suddenly becomes a probabilistic symbol. In this case, if the probability variation pattern is suddenly derived and displayed, the player may be misunderstood that the state has been shifted to the probability variation state without being shifted to the probability variation state. In order to avoid such misunderstandings, in this embodiment, a control is executed that prohibits suddenly derivation and display of the same symbol as the probability variation symbol as a symbol.

  FIG. 7 also shows symbols other than suddenly probable symbols (such as “74C” to “77C”; hereinafter referred to as “suddenly similar symbols”). These suddenly similar symbols have the same sequence (combination) of the sudden probability variation symbols and numbers, but are stopped and displayed on a line different from the line where the sudden probability variation symbols are stopped. That is, in the example of “135”, the suddenly probable symbols are stopped and displayed on the middle line, while the suddenly similar symbols are stopped and displayed on the upper and lower lines. Since such a symbol suddenly resembles a probable variation symbol, if it is derived and displayed as an outlier symbol, the player may misunderstand that the sudden probability variation symbol has been derived and displayed. For this reason, as in the case of the sudden probability variation symbol, a control is executed to prohibit the derivation and display of the sudden similarity symbol as a symbol.

(2-5) In the same manner as the suddenly probable symbols, the small hit symbols of the decorative symbols are also specific symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”) in which the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is different on the middle line. "7" and "8"). However, the small hit design is different from the probability variation design and the arrangement (combination) of numbers. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, 10 types of symbols (designs surrounded by a thick frame: “83C” “88C” “153C” “158C” “163C” “168C” “ 173C "," 178C "," 183C "," 188C "). Specifically, the symbols in the state where “531”, “175”, “317”, “357”, “378”, “518”, “713”, “815”, “853” and “875” are stopped and displayed on the middle line are small. It is a winning symbol. A small hit symbol is also called a chance for a small hit.

  In this way, since the small hit symbol of the decorative symbol is a symbol that resembles the suddenly probable symbol, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the sudden big odd hit or the small hit has occurred from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. become. In addition, as described above, since the same special performance (except for the performance only for sudden accuracy) is executed in the sudden odd change big hit state and the small hit state, the player suddenly has a probable big hit from the content of the production. It will not be possible to recognize whether it has occurred or a small hit has occurred. In addition, if the game is controlled to either the probability variation state or the normal game state after the sudden probability big hit or small hit, the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened in both the probability variation state and the normal game state. In addition, since the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are not improved and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not shortened, the player cannot recognize to which state the gaming state has been changed. Therefore, the expectation for the transition to the probability change state by the player can be maintained after the sudden probability big hit or small hit ends. As for the special symbols, the sudden probability variation symbol is “5” and the small hit symbol is “4”, which are different symbols.

  When the missing symbol is determined, the determined missing symbol may accidentally become a small hit symbol. In this case, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the probability change may have suddenly occurred (the player may have shifted to the probability change state). In order to avoid such a misunderstanding, in this embodiment, a control is executed to prohibit the same symbol as the small hit symbol from being derived and displayed as a symbol.

  FIG. 8 also shows symbols other than the small hit symbol (such as “84C” to “87C”; hereinafter referred to as “small hit similar symbol”). These small hit similar symbols have the same arrangement (combination) of the small hit symbols and numbers, but are stopped and displayed on a line different from the line on which the small hit symbols are stopped. That is, in the example of “531”, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line, but the small hit similar symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper and lower lines. Since such a symbol is similar to the small hit symbol, if it is derived and displayed as an outlier symbol, the player may misunderstand that the sudden probability variation symbol similar to the small hit symbol is derived and displayed. For this reason, as in the case of the small hit symbol, control for prohibiting derivation and display of the small hit similar symbol as a symbol is executed.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 9 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A basic circuit (corresponding to game control means) 53 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The basic circuit 53 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, and a game control microcomputer 560 having a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program. And an I / O port unit 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 also includes an I / O port unit.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (or performs processing) specifically. Is that the CPU 56 executes control according to the program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. The game control means is realized by a basic circuit 53 including a game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the basic circuit 53 is mounted on the main board 31 and is specially variable. A solenoid circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the winning device (opening / closing plate 20) and the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 according to a command from the basic circuit 53 is also mounted on the main board 31, and is used for game control when the power is turned on. In accordance with data provided from a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the microcomputer 560 and the basic circuit 53, an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state is sent to an external device such as a hall computer. Information output circuit 64 is also mounted on main board 31. It has been.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 performs display control of the special symbol display 8 that variably displays the special symbol, and also performs display control of the normal symbol display 10 that variably displays the normal symbol. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the display state of the special symbol hold storage display 18 and also controls the display state of the normal symbol hold storage display 41.

  The hitting ball launching device that hits and launches the game ball launches the game ball toward the game area 7 as the launch motor 94 rotates. A power signal for driving the firing motor 94 is supplied to the firing motor 94 via the touch sensor substrate 90 from a power source mounted on a power supply board (not shown). A connection signal (VL signal) is input from the card unit 50 to the touch sensor substrate 90 via the interface substrate 66. Further, the touching of the operation knob (hitting ball handle) 5 by the player is detected by a touch sensor mounted on the touch sensor substrate 90. Then, the detection signal from the touch sensor and the signal from the power source are input to one AND circuit on the touch sensor substrate 90, and the output signal of the one AND circuit and the VL signal from the card unit 50 are the touch sensor substrate. 90 is input to another AND circuit, and a signal is output from the other AND circuit to the firing motor 94. Therefore, when the detection signal is not output from the touch sensor because the VL signal from the card unit 50 is not output to the touch sensor substrate 90 or the player does not touch the operation knob 5, the firing motor 94 The drive is stopped.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the variable display device 9 that receives and variably displays the decorative design is performed.

  FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 10, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 100 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a strobe signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 using the LCD based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit is installed. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 10 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 105. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted bidirectionally between the effect control microcomputer 100, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores character image data that is frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, and the like (including decorative designs). Is. The effect control microcomputer 100 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control of the variable display device 9 based on data input from the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by game control means (game control microcomputer 560: CPU 56 and peripheral circuits such as ROM 54 and RAM 55) on the main board 31. When power is turned on to the gaming machine and the input level of the reset terminal becomes high level, the gaming control microcomputer 560 starts main processing after step S1. In the main process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, the built-in device register is initialized (step S4). Further, after initialization (step S5) of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), the RAM is set in an accessible state (step S6). The interrupt mode 2 is an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device. Is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the state of the output signal of a clear switch (not shown) input via the input port only once (step S7). When ON is detected in the confirmation, the game control microcomputer 560 executes normal initialization processing (steps S11 to S14).

  If the clear switch is not in the on state, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area of the RAM 55 (for example, processing for stopping power supply such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S8). If it is confirmed that such a protection process is not performed, the game control microcomputer 560 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

  When it is confirmed that there is a backup, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the game control microcomputer 560 returns the game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Is performed (step S10). Then, the saved value of the PC (program counter) stored in the backup RAM area is set in the PC, and the address is restored.

  In the initialization process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs a RAM clear process (step S11). In addition, a predetermined work area (for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a payout command storage pointer, a winning ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, etc. A work area setting process for setting an initial value to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the state is performed (step S12). Further, a process of transmitting an initialization command for initializing the sub-boards (the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80 in this embodiment) to each sub-board is executed (step S13). Examples of the initialization command include a command indicating an initial design of a decorative design displayed on the variable display device 9.

  Then, the CTC register provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 2 ms (step S14). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S11 to S14) is completed, the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) are repeatedly executed in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. (Step S19). The display random number is a random number for determining a special symbol losing symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8 or a random number for determining a pattern variation pattern. The display random number update process is a display random number. This is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for use. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). In a game control process described later, when the count value of the jackpot determination random number generation counter makes one round, an initial value is set in the counter.

  Note that when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited. The display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are also executed in the timer interrupt process described later. This is to avoid competing with the processing in the timer interrupt processing. That is, a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of step S17 or step S18, and a counter value for generating a display random number during the timer interrupt processing or a counter count value for generating an initial value random number If updated, the continuity of the count value may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt disabled state is set during the processing of step S17 and step S18.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs during the execution of the main process, specifically, in the period when the interrupt is permitted during the execution of the loop process of Steps S16 to S19, the game control microcomputer 560 displays FIG. The timer interruption process of steps S20 to S37 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off process, when it is detected that the power-off signal is output, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the state determination is performed (switch processing: Step S21).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the display of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold memory indicator 18, the normal symbol hold memory indicator 41, and a status indicator (not shown). A display control process is performed (step S22). For the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, and the status indicator, control for outputting a drive signal to each indicator is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S34 to S36.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step) S23). The game control microcomputer 560 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: step S24, S25).

Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether or not to generate a big hit (and whether or not to generate a big hit) (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2: Determine the type of jackpot (for determining the jackpot type)
(3) Random 3: Determine the special symbol's off symbol (for determining off symbol)
(4) Random 4: Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination) (5) Random 5: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for determination per normal symbol)
(6) Random 6: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the random 1 initial value)
(7) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the random 5 initial value)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 12, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) a big hit determination random number, (2) a big hit type determination random number, and (5) a normal symbol determination determination. A counter for generating a random number is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the game effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (7) are also used.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a special symbol process (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special variable winning device (large winning a prize port) in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs normal symbol process processing (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. By executing the normal symbol process, the display control of the normal symbol display 10 and the opening / closing control of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are executed.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of sending an effect control command or the like related to display control of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 9 (decorative symbol command control processing: step S28).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a (step). S30). Specifically, the payout control mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any of the start opening switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a test terminal process which is a process for generating and outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine (step S31). Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a drive command is issued to the solenoid circuit 59 (step S32: output process). The solenoid circuit 59 drives the solenoids 16 and 21 in response to a drive command in order to open the variable winning ball device 15 or the opening / closing plate 20 in an open state or a closed state.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved storage (step S33).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in accordance with the value of the special symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data. A control process is performed (step S34). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a special symbol variable display on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal symbol display control data for performing the normal symbol effect display according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data. A control process is performed (step S35). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may change the display rate (“○” and “×”) every 0.2 seconds when the normal symbol fluctuation speed is 0.2 seconds. Further, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a state display lamp display process for setting the state display control data for displaying the state display lamp in accordance with the game state in the output buffer for setting the state display control data (step). S36). The game control microcomputer 560 executes the display of the status indicator lamp by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S37), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S36 in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIGS. 13 and 14 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. FIG. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 is executed.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 performs the special symbol process, if the start opening switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. That is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 has occurred (step S311), it is confirmed whether or not the reserved memory number (start winning memory number) has reached the upper limit value (held memory number = 4). (Step S312).

  When the number of reserved memories has not reached the upper limit (N in step S312), the game control microcomputer 560 extracts software random numbers (such as a counter value for generating a big hit determination random number, etc.) Is stored in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved storage number counter as the extracted random number value (step S313). Extracting a random number means reading a count value from a counter for generating a random number and setting the read count value as a random value. In step S313, random 1 to random 4 are extracted from the above random numbers. In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the reserved storage number are secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number and the like and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the reserved memory counter indicating the number of reserved memories by 1 (step S314). Although not shown in FIG. 13, when the value of the pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, the start prize memory designation command (the start prize memory designation command at this time is the start prize memory number when the start prize is generated). Is a command indicating that +1 has been added). Thereafter, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag).

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): When the microcomputer 560 for game control is in a state where variable symbol special display can be started, the number of numerical data stored in the reserved memory buffer (the number of reserved memories) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the hold storage counter. Then, if the count value of the holding storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit (whether or not the display result of the variable symbol special display is the specific display result). In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set, and the type of big hit (non-probable big hit, probable big hit, sudden probable big hit, etc.) is determined. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether to make a small hit. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): For determining a variation pattern that is extracted when a variation pattern of variable display of a special symbol (effect mode during symbol variation: variation time is also specified by the variation pattern) is generated at the time of start winning. Selection is made from among a plurality of types of variation patterns determined in advance according to the value of a random number (one of display random numbers). Further, based on the determined variation pattern, after setting the variable display time (variation time) until the special symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the special symbol process timer, the special symbol process timer is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S302.

  Special symbol changing process (step S302): When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in step S301 times out), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed. The value is updated according to step S303.

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): The variable symbol display on the special symbol indicator 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for designating the stop of variable display of the decorative symbols on the variable display device 9 is transmitted to the effect control board 80. If the jackpot flag is set, the time from when the jackpot symbol is stopped until the jackpot game starts (the jackpot display time) is set in the jackpot control timer, and then the jackpot control timer is started. Let In addition, the effect control board 80 is provided with an effect control command (fanfare command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute a signal effect (fanfare effect) indicating that the jackpot game is started after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Send. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S304. When the small hit flag is set, after setting the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol to the start of the small hit game (small hit display time) in the big prize control timer, Start the control timer. In addition, a special effect in the small hit game after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (2 round effect; the 2 round effect is an effect that is executed when a sudden sudden change big hit occurs (excluding the direct effect) The effect control command (fanfare command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute the effect) is transmitted to the effect control board 80. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S308. When the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S300.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S304): When the big hit display time has elapsed, control for opening the large winning opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the special winning opening control process is set in the special winning opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305.

  Processing for opening a special prize opening (step S305): A process for confirming the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is established, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special winning prize opening by closing the special variable prize winning device. In addition, the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S306.

  Post-winner opening process (step S306): When the interval time has elapsed, it is confirmed whether there is a remaining round. If there are remaining rounds, control to open the big prize opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the special winning opening control process is set in the special winning opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305. On the other hand, when all rounds are finished, an effect control command (ending command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform an effect (ending effect) for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is issued. After transmitting to the effect control board 80 and setting the execution time of the big hit end process (big hit end time) in the big prize opening control timer, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S307.

  Big hit end process (step S307): A predetermined flag set / reset process for ending the big hit gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): When the small hit display time or interval time has elapsed, it is checked whether there is a remaining round. If there are remaining rounds, control to open the big prize opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. In addition, the execution time (round time) of the small hit release process is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S309. On the other hand, when all rounds are completed, the execution time of the small hit end process (small hit end time) is set in the big prize opening control timer, and then the internal state is updated to a value according to step S310.

  Opening process for small hits (step S309): A process for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is established, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special winning prize opening by closing the special variable prize winning device. Then, the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state is updated to a value according to step S308.

  Small hit end process (step S310): A predetermined flag set / reset process for ending the small hit gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S300.

  15 and 16 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control board 80. In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration. The first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15, commands 8000 (H) to 807 B (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols variably displayed on the variable display device 9 in response to variable display of special symbols. Pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start.

  Commands 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands for designating the contents of the stop symbols (display results) of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, commands 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as symbol information designation commands.

  The command 8C00 (H) is an effect control command (outgoing designation command) for designating that the stop symbol (display result) of the special symbol is determined as the offcoming symbol. Command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command (ordinary big hit designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol has been decided as a non-probable variation symbol (that is, a non-probability variation big hit (also referred to as a normal big hit)). ).

  The command 8C02 (H) is an effect control command (designated to specify that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol (that is, a probable variation big hit is determined), and that it is determined not to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts. 1 specified command per probability variation. Command 8C03 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit 2 designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is decided as the probability varying symbol and that it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit game. Command 8C04 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be a probable variable symbol and that it is determined to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game is finished (during the ending effect) 3 designation command).

  Command 8C05 (H) is an effect control command (suddenly probable big hit designation command) for designating that the stop symbol of the special symbol has been suddenly determined to be a probable change symbol (that is, that it has been determined to be suddenly probable big hit). The command 8C06 (H) is an effect control command (small hit designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as the small hit symbol (that is, determined as the small hit symbol).

  Here, the “re-lottery effect” refers to an effect that makes it appear that the jackpot symbol is re-lotted and displayed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9. Specifically, when it is determined in advance that the jackpot symbol (non-probability variable symbol or probability variable symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9, the left, right and right decorative symbols are the same in the variable display device 9. This is an effect of deriving and displaying a jackpot symbol (non-probability variation symbol or probability variation symbol) after stopping and displaying the non-probability variation symbol and then changing the non-probability variation symbol again (see FIG. 104). The re-lottery effect includes a case where a non-probable variable symbol is promoted to a probable variable symbol (when a non-probable variable symbol is displayed after being stopped), and a case where a non-probable variable symbol is not promoted to a probable variable symbol (a non-probable variable symbol is displayed). When the non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed again after the stop display. The re-lottery effect that promotes a non-probable variable symbol to a probabilistic symbol is called “promotion effect” or “rising effect”.

  In this embodiment, the timing for executing the re-drawing effect is “during symbol change”, “during big hit game”, “after big hit game is over”. When the game control microcomputer 560 causes the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute a re-lottery effect during “change in design”, the game control microcomputer 560 specifies execution of the re-lottery effect with a change pattern command. Further, when the game control microcomputer 560 causes the production control microcomputer 100 to execute the re-lottery effect “during the big hit game” or “after the big hit game is finished”, the “in jackpot game” is executed by the symbol information designation command. Alternatively, the execution of the re-drawing effect “after the end of the big hit game” is designated. The effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect at a predetermined timing based on the contents of the variation pattern command or the symbol information designation command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for designating stop of variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols on the variable display device 9.

  Commands 9500 (H) to 9503 (H) are effect control commands (background designation commands) for designating background display according to the gaming state in the variable display device 9. Command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the normal gaming state. The command 9501 (H) is an effect control command (high probability state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the probability variation state (high probability state). The command 9502 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the time-short state. The command 9503 (H) is an effect control command (chance state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the chance mode state. The chance mode is an effect mode in which an expectation for the transition to the probability change state is given after the sudden probability big hit and the small hit end.

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating display during the customer waiting demonstration.

  In the example shown in FIG. 16, commands A000 (H) to A004 (H) are effect control commands (fanfare designation commands) for designating that a big hit game is started. Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 1 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when a normal big hit (non-probable big hit) is determined. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 2 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when it is determined that the probability variation big hit is determined and the re-lottery effect is not executed after the big hit game is started. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 3 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when it is determined that a probability variation big hit is determined and a re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 4 designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot when it is decided that a re-lottery effect is to be executed after the jackpot game is determined and the re-lottery effect is executed after the jackpot game ends (during the ending effect) ). Command A004 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 5 designation command) that designates the start of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a big prize opening) that designates display during a round in the 15 round jackpot game. The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) in the 15 round big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set.

  Commands A301 (H) to A305 (H) are effect control commands (ending designation commands) that designate the end of the big hit game. The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (ending 1 designation command) for designating the end of the normal jackpot game (displaying that the game will shift to the short time state after the jackpot game is finished). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of jackpot when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is not executed after the jackpot game is started. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the big hit when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game. Command A304 (H) is an effect control command (ending 4 designation command) that is promoted to a probable variation symbol in the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game (during the ending effect) and designates that it will be a promising big hit. Command A 305 (H) is an effect control command (ending 5 designation command) for designating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot. Note that the command A 302 (H) and the command A 303 (H) may be a common command. In this case, the common command is an effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is not to be executed after the jackpot game ends (during the ending effect). The

  Command A4XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a big prize opening) that designates display during a round in a two-round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game). Command A5XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) in the two round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game). In “XX”, the number of rounds is set.

  Command A600 (H) is an effect control command (small hit fanfare designation command) that designates that a small hit game is started.

  The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (start winning memory designation command) for designating the number of starting winning memories shown by XX.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, the contents shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. Accordingly, the display state of the variable display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound output board 70. It should be noted that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, when displaying the number of winning balls that is a big hit on the variable display device 9, an effect control command for designating the count number of the count switch 23 is also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  FIG. 17 to FIG. 19 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a variation pattern used in this embodiment. 17 to 19, “S” of “line” indicates that single reach (one of 1UH to 8UH, 1LH to 8LH, 1CH to 8CH in FIG. 3) is established, and “W” of “line”. Indicates that double reach (any one of 1WH to 8WH in FIG. 3) is established, and “S & W” of “line” indicates that either single reach or double reach is established. “Selection table” indicates the table number of the table used when determining the decorative design.

  In this example, each variation pattern has a variation pattern when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is “out-of-line” (a variation pattern dedicated to the loss) and a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the stop symbol at the time of the variable stop before the big hit) The variation pattern when the symbol becomes “non-probable variation” or “probability variation” (variation pattern for both probable big hit / normal big hit) and the stop symbol for the decorative symbol (the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop before the big hit) are “probable variation” ”Is the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern dedicated to probability variation jackpot), and the decorative pattern stop pattern (stop pattern at the time of variation stop before big hit) is“ non-probability variation symbol ” Variation pattern), the variation pattern when the stop symbol of the decorative design is “suddenly probable variation” (variation pattern dedicated to sudden sudden variation jackpot), and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is “suddenly probabilistic variation” Or it is distinguished in the variation pattern when the "Koatari symbol" (variation pattern of sudden probability variation jackpot / Koatari combined).

  Normal fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 1 and 3) that do not involve reach in the normal gaming state and short hours and normal that do not involve reach in the short-time state (including the short-term state when the probability change) Fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 2 and 4), fluctuation pattern with normal reach (simple reach mode) (variation numbers 5 to 8), fluctuation pattern with super reach A (variation numbers 9 to 14), super A variation pattern with reach B (variation numbers 15 to 23), a variation pattern with super reach C (variation numbers 24 to 31), and a variation pattern with super reach D (variation numbers 32 to 41) are provided. Yes. Here, the fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 1 to 4) of the normal fluctuation without reach is not accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A having the fluctuation numbers 1 and 2 after the normal fluctuation. Fluctuation pattern) and a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern accompanied by a stop of the chance number A of fluctuation numbers 3 and 4) that is displayed without stopping after the normal fluctuation but developed into super reach. It has been. In addition, the fluctuation pattern with the super reach (variation numbers 9 to 41) includes the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation numbers 9 to 22 and 24 to 39 of the chances of the change numbers 9 to 41, which develop into the normal reach after the normal fluctuation and then develop into the super reach). Fluctuation pattern without change), change pattern that develops to super reach B after chance eye A is temporarily stopped after normal change (change pattern with chance number A stop of change number 23), after normal change There is provided a variation pattern (variation pattern accompanied by the stop of the chance number B of the variation numbers 40 and 41) that develops to the super reach D after the chance number B is temporarily stopped. In addition, after the reach out symbol is temporarily displayed, a “relief loss” effect (for example, an effect in which the character attempts to break the off symbol in which the character is temporarily stopped but the loss is fixed without breaking) is executed. Variation patterns (variation numbers 21, 22, 30, 31, 38, 39, 41) are also provided.

  Here, “normal reach” refers to the case where the middle symbol changes rapidly after the reach is established, the change rate / direction of the middle symbol changes after the reach is established, or after the reach is established. There are cases where a character appears or the background changes after reach is established. However, in the case of normal reach, the mode of production is relatively simple. On the other hand, “super reach” combines a plurality of effects of normal reach, develops from normal reach to another effect, or executes an effect with a story. In the case of super reach, an effect that makes it possible to expect a big hit than normal reach is performed. In general, the fluctuation time is set longer in the super reach than in the normal reach. In addition, the specific production | generation aspect of normal reach is demonstrated using FIG. 87, and the specific production | generation aspect of super reach is demonstrated using FIG. 84, FIG. 88-FIG.

  Also, four types of super reach A to D are provided as super reach, and different effects are executed. The same type of performance is executed in the same super reach (for example, super reach B). In other words, different variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for executing the same super reach. However, in these variation patterns, the production until the development of super reach is different (development from chance eyes or development from normal reach) Or how many frame gaps in the case of development from normal reach), the production after super reach is different (whether there is a relief production, whether there is a re-drawing production), the period of Aori production during super reach The same type of performance is executed for the same super reach only by differences. Further, as will be described later, the presentation control microcomputer 100 performs different presentations according to the types of chances, but only the characters that operate are different, and the same type of superreach is used. Production is performed. For example, in the case of Super Reach B, other effects such as background and sound differ depending on whether the cat scratches the pattern, the girl character scratches the pattern, or the other animal character scratches depending on the chance eye type. Are the same. However, as long as the background is the same, the production is not always the same. For example, in the same type of production, the character production is the same, but only the background may be different.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the variation pattern with the reach for detachment (variation pattern of variation numbers 5 to 41), the symbol difference (“−2”, “−1”, “+1”) of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols). "" +2 ") is also specified.

  In this case, the symbol difference in the variation pattern with normal reach (variation pattern of variation numbers 5 to 8) is the symbol difference between the reach symbol and the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed at the end of the variation. For example, when the reach symbol when the single reach is established is “7” and the symbol difference designated by the variation pattern is “−2”, the symbol “767” is stopped and displayed at the end of the variation.

  In addition, among the variation patterns with super reach, the symbol differences in the variation patterns without variation of the chance chances (variation patterns with variation numbers 9 to 22 and 24 to 39) are the reach symbols and the super reach development (at the end of normal reach). It is a symbol difference with the middle symbol displayed temporarily stopped at. For example, if the reach symbol when the single reach is established is “7” and the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern is “−2”, the middle symbol becomes “6” at the end of the normal reach of “7”. “767” is displayed as a temporary stop, and then the middle symbol is re-varied to develop into super reach. In this embodiment, in the case of a loss, the same middle symbol as the middle symbol (for example, “6”) temporarily stopped at the time of super reach development is stopped at the end of super reach. Therefore, it can be said that the fluctuation pattern with super reach specifies the difference between the reach symbol and the middle symbol at the time of super reach development, and also specifies the difference between the reach symbol and the middle symbol at the end of super reach.

  In addition, among the variation patterns with super reach, the symbol difference in the variation pattern with variation of chance chance (variation patterns of variation numbers 23, 40, 41) stops at the end of reach design and super reach (at the end of variation). It is a symbol difference from the displayed middle symbol. As will be described later, among the fluctuation patterns with super reach, in the fluctuation pattern with stop of the chance chance, the chance eye is stopped and displayed after the normal fluctuation, and then develops into super reach (that is, normal reach is not executed). This is because it is not necessary to designate a design difference between the reach symbol and the middle symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the super reach is developed (at the end of normal reach).

  As the normal big hit / probable big hit variation pattern, a variation pattern with normal reach (variation number 87), a variation pattern with super reach A (variation numbers 88 to 93), and a variation pattern with super reach B (variation number 94). ˜100), a variation pattern with super reach C (variation numbers 101 to 106), and a variation pattern with super reach D (variation numbers 107 to 114). Here, the fluctuation pattern with the super reach (variation numbers 88 to 114) includes the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation numbers 88 to 99, 101 to 112) that develop into the normal reach after the normal fluctuation and then develop into the super reach. Fluctuation pattern without stopping), a fluctuation pattern that develops to super reach B after the chance eye A is temporarily stopped after normal fluctuation (variation pattern with the chance number A stopping at the fluctuation number 100), and normal fluctuation A variation pattern (variation pattern accompanied by a stop of the chance number B of the variation numbers 113 and 114) that develops into the super reach D after the chance number B is temporarily stopped and displayed later is provided. In addition, when the double reach is established, the symbol that comes first (for example, “1” when the symbol “1” or “2” becomes a double reach and “1”) becomes the big hit (first hit) and the symbol that comes later ( For example, the same variation pattern is divided between the case of “2” when the double reach is achieved with the symbols “1” and “2”, and the case of a big hit (later hit). In this embodiment, the variation pattern for both the normal big hit / probable big hit is always “re-lottery” effect during the fluctuation of the symbol.

  As variation patterns dedicated to the probable big hits, variation patterns with normal reach (variation numbers 42 and 43), variation patterns with super reach A (variation numbers 44 to 53), and variation patterns with super reach B (variation numbers 54 to 53). 64), a variation pattern with a super reach C (variation numbers 65 to 74), and a variation pattern with a super reach D (variation numbers 75 to 86). Here, the variation pattern with the super reach (variation numbers 44 to 86) includes the variation pattern (the variation numbers 44 to 62 and 65 to 83) that develop into the normal reach after the normal variation and then develop into the super reach. Change pattern without stop), change pattern that develops to super reach B after chance eye A is temporarily stopped after normal change (variation pattern with stop of chance eye A of change numbers 63 and 64), normal There is provided a variation pattern (variation pattern accompanied by a stop of the chance number B of variation numbers 84 to 86) that develops into super reach D after the chance number B is temporarily stopped and displayed after the variation. In addition, after reaching out of reach, the symbol that is temporarily stopped is displayed, and then a “relief hit” effect (for example, an effect in which the character breaks the symbol that is temporarily stopped and replaced with a big hit symbol) is performed to derive and display the big hit symbol. Patterns (variation numbers 43, 47, 52, 53, 57, 62, 64, 68, 73, 74, 78, 83, 86) are also provided. In addition, when double reach is established, the same variation pattern is divided between the case where the symbol that comes first is a big hit (first hit) and the case that is a big hit if the symbol comes later (later hit).

  As a variation pattern exclusively for big hits, a variation pattern with normal reach (variation number 115), a variation pattern with super reach A (variation numbers 116 and 117), and a variation pattern with super reach C (variation numbers 118 to 121). And are provided. In addition, when double reach is established, the same variation pattern is divided between the case where the symbol that comes first is a big hit (first hit) and the case that is a big hit if the symbol comes later (later hit).

  As shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, among the variation patterns with the jackpot reach (variation patterns with the variation numbers 42 to 121), the variation pattern with the normal reach (the variation patterns with the variation numbers 42, 43, 87, and 115). In the variation pattern other than the variation pattern (variation patterns of variation numbers 63, 64, 84 to 86, 100, 113, and 114) accompanied by the chance eye stop, the symbol difference of the middle symbol (“−” with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols)). 2 ”,“ −1 ”,“ +1 ”) is designated.

  In this case, among the variation patterns accompanied by super reach, the symbol difference in the variation pattern (variation patterns of variation numbers 44 to 62, 65 to 83, 88 to 99, 101 to 112) not accompanied by the stop of the chance is the reach symbol. And the symbol difference between the intermediate symbol displayed temporarily during super-reach development (at the end of normal reach). For example, if the reach symbol when the single reach is established is “7” and the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern is “−2”, the middle symbol becomes “6” at the end of the normal reach of “7”. “767” is displayed as a temporary stop, and then the symbol is re-varied to develop into super reach.

  In the case of a fluctuation pattern with normal reach (except when the relief effect is executed), the change pattern is a big hit at the end of the normal reach and the chance eye is stopped and displayed (except when the relief effect is executed). In the case of, since it reaches a super-reach after stopping the chance chance (that is, normal reach is not executed), the design pattern difference between the reach design and the middle design is not specified in the variation pattern.

  A variation pattern (variation number 124) for executing sudden probability variation entry effect is provided as a variation pattern dedicated to sudden probability variation big hit. A variation pattern (variation number 122) for executing a time mission entry effect and a variation pattern (variation number 123) for executing a sudden probability change / small hit common entry effect are provided as a variation pattern for both sudden probability variation big hit / small hit. ing.

  Here, the “sudden probability change entry effect” is a special effect that indicates sudden change into probability change. The player can recognize that the player has entered the probability change state due to the sudden execution of the probability change entry effect. The “time mission entry effect” is a special effect indicating that a time mission (presentation where a mission is presented and a big hit is achieved when the mission is achieved within a predetermined time) is entered. The “sudden probability change / small hit common entry effect” is a special effect indicating sudden change or a small hit. The player cannot determine whether or not the state has been shifted to the probability change state only by executing the time mission entry effect or the sudden probability change / small hit common entry effect.

  In this embodiment, when the “sudden probability change entry effect” is executed, a sudden probability change pattern (an opportunity for sudden accuracy) is derived and displayed, after which the effect for 2 rounds is executed and suddenly enters the probability change. The state is shifted to a state in which the effect (a kind of effect in the chance mode) is executed. In addition, when the “time mission entry effect” is executed, a probability variation symbol or a small hit symbol (a chance item for a small hit) is suddenly derived and displayed, and then an effect during the mission presentation (a kind of effect in the chance mode) ) Is executed. In addition, when the “sudden probability change / small hit common entry effect” is executed, a sudden probability change symbol or small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and then it is impossible to determine whether the sudden probability change or small hit has occurred (chance) The mode is shifted to a state in which a kind of effect in the mode is executed.

  In this embodiment, after the mission entry effect is executed and the chance eyes (suddenly probable symbols or small hits symbols) are derived and displayed, “predetermined outcome (for example,“ 7 in the middle of the left display area ” When a mission (command) is issued in a stage during a mission, a specific reach, such as the predetermined chance shown in FIGS. When a predetermined outcome is derived and displayed in time), the player is controlled in a state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit, a transition to a probable change state, or a super reach). When the “predetermined outcome” is selected from a plurality of types as described above, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the predetermined outcome and designates it with a variation pattern command, thereby producing an effect control microcomputer. 100 (100) may be displayed (presented), or the presentation control microcomputer 100 may uniquely determine and display (present) a predetermined output.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, a predetermined variation time is preset for each variation pattern, and the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the variation time together with the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command. Is possible. In addition, the second byte of EXT data in the 2-byte effect control command is assigned to each variation pattern. For example, “00 (H)” is assigned as the “EXT data” to the variation pattern of the variation number 1, and “7B (H)” is assigned to the variation pattern of the variation number 124 as the “EXT data”. The effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes the content (variation number) of the variation pattern from the “EXT data” assigned to the variation pattern command.

  20 to 22 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 can start the variation of the special symbol (when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, that is, the special symbol indicator If the special symbol change display is not made in step 8 and the big hit game is not being played or the small hit game is not being played (step S51), the start winning memory number (holding memory number) is confirmed (step S52). Specifically, the count value of the hold storage counter is confirmed.

  If the starting winning memory number is not 0, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting winning memory number = 1 is read and stored in the random number storage buffer of the RAM 55 (step S53), and the starting winning memory number 1 is reduced by 1 and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S54). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the start winning memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting winning memory number = n−1.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the current game state (normal game state, probability change state, short time state, etc.) and sets the address of the background designation command transmission table corresponding to the game state to the pointer (step). S55). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (FIG. 36) described later (step S56). If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a normal state background designation command is transmitted. If the current gaming state is the probability variation time short state, the probability variation state background designation command is transmitted, and the current gaming state is short. If it is in a state, a time-short state background designation command is transmitted. In this embodiment, a chance state background designation command is transmitted when the mode is changed to the chance mode suddenly after the end of a game with big odds or small hits.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S57), and executes the jackpot determination processing module (step S58). The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a jackpot determination value determined in advance with a random number value for jackpot determination and determining that the jackpot determination value is a jackpot if they match. Here, in the jackpot determination, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state, probability change short state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal game state and short time state). It is comprised so that it may become. Specifically, a high-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and a low-probability jackpot determination table in which the number of jackpot determination values is set smaller than the high-probability jackpot determination table are provided. Keep it. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state. If the gaming state is a high probability state, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the high probability jackpot determination table to perform the jackpot determination process. If the gaming state is a low probability state, a big hit determination process is performed using a low probability big hit determination table. With such a configuration, the probability of a big hit is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

  Whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state and probability variation time short state) is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag indicating that the game state is the probability variation state and the probability variation time short state is set. Is done.

  FIGS. 23A and 23B show the distribution ratios of the determination values in the jackpot determination table in this embodiment. FIG. 23A shows the distribution ratio of the judgment values in the jackpot judgment table in the low probability state (normal game state and short time state), and FIG. 23B shows the high probability state (probability variation state, probability variation short time state). The distribution ratio of the judgment value in the jackpot judgment table at the time is shown. As shown in FIGS. 23 (A) and 23 (B), in this embodiment, the number of random numbers for jackpot determination is 65536. That is, the range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535. The number of jackpot determination values at the low probability is 164, and the jackpot probability at the low probability is 0.00250 (1 / 399.6). The number of jackpot determination values at the time of high probability is 1640, which is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values at the time of low probability, and the jackpot probability at high probability is 0.02502 (1 / 40.0).

  If the big hit determination module determines that the big hit is not made (N in step S59), the game control microcomputer 560 proceeds to the process in step S64 in FIG.

  When it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination module (Y in step S59), a big hit flag is set (step S60). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot type determining random number from the random number storage buffer (step S61), and hits the jackpot type (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot, probability variation jackpot, jackpot that executes the re-lottery effect during the jackpot game) After the game is over, a process of determining a probability variation big hit for executing a re-lottery effect or a sudden probability variation big hit) is executed (step S62).

  The jackpot type determination process is performed using a jackpot type determination table. In the jackpot type determination table, as shown in FIG. 23C, a predetermined number of jackpot type determination random number values are allocated in advance for each jackpot type. Specifically, the number of random numbers for determining the jackpot type is 100 (that is, the range of the random value for determining the jackpot type is 0 to 99), of which 0 to 31 is assigned to “normal”, and 32 to 74 are assigned. “Probability change 1” is assigned, 75 to 81 are assigned to “probability change 2”, 82 to 96 are assigned to “probability change 3”, and 97 to 99 are assigned to “probability”. Here, “normal” indicates a normal jackpot, “probability variation 1” indicates a probability variation jackpot (no re-lottery effect), “probability variation 2” indicates a probability variation jackpot (execution of a re-lottery effect during the jackpot), and “probability variation 3”. "" Indicates a probable big hit (execution of the redrawing effect at the ending), and "surprise" suddenly shows a probable big hit. In FIG. 23C, the numbers (0.0008 etc.) shown below represent the ratio (probability) that each jackpot type occurs in one start winning (fluctuation). The game control microcomputer 560 determines the big hit type, that is, the normal big hit, the probable big hit (no redrawing effect), the probable big hit (during the big hit), depending on which range the random number for determining the big hit type read in step S61 belongs. One of re-lottery effect execution), probability variation jackpot (re-lottery effect execution at ending) and sudden probability variation jackpot is determined. In this way, by determining the big hit type, not only whether the big hit is a normal big hit, a probable big hit, or a sudden probable big hit, whether to execute a re-lottery effect (promotion effect) and what kind of re-lottery effect It is also determined whether to execute at the timing.

  The percentage of the decorative symbols that include a specific symbol (a symbol that becomes a probable big hit when aligned on the effective line) is 5/8 = 62.5%. That is, as described above, when the eight symbols of the numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, and “8” are aligned on the active line, Among them, when 5 symbols of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” and “8” are aligned on the effective line, it becomes a probable big hit. = 62.5%.

  On the other hand, the probability of a probabilistic big hit (excluding sudden probable big hits) with respect to the probability of a big round of 15 rounds (15 round normal big hits and 15 rounds probable big hits), that is, “normal” “probability 1” “probability” As shown in FIG. 23C, the ratio at which “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2”, and “probability variation 3” are determined with respect to the ratio in which “2” and “probability variation 3” are determined is (43 + 7 + 15) / (32 + 43 + 7 + 15) = 65 / 97≈67%. In addition, the probability that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped with respect to the probability that the big hit symbol indicating the big hit of 15 rounds is derived and displayed when the variation of the ornament symbol is stopped, that is, “normal”, “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2”. The ratio at which “probability variation 1” is determined relative to the ratio at which “probability variation 3” is determined is (43) / (32 + 43 + 7 + 15) = 43 / 97≈44.3% as shown in FIG. is there.

  That is, when the big hit of 15 rounds ("normal", "probability change 1", "probability change 2", "probability change 3") is determined, when the normal big hit is determined (when "normal" is determined), A variation pattern command dedicated to normal big hit is sent, and a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of variation stop based on that command, or a variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit is sent and normal big hit Designated symbol information designation commands are transmitted, and a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of variation stop based on those commands. In addition, when it is decided to promote to a probable big hit in the re-draw lottery effect after the start of the big hit game (when “probable change 2” or “probable change 3” is determined), a variation pattern command dedicated to normal big hit is sent Based on the command, a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of variation stop, or a variation pattern command for both a probable big hit / normal big hit is sent and a design with two probable big hits or three probable big hits is designated An information designation command is transmitted, and an uncertain variable symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of a variable stop based on those commands. On the other hand, out of the cases where 15 round big hits (“normal”, “probability change 1”, “probability change 2”, “probability change 3”) are determined, when the probability change big hit (without re-drawing effect) is determined (“probability change 1” is When it is determined), a variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot is transmitted and the probability variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of variation stop based on that command, or the variation pattern command for both probability variation big hit / normal big hit is At the same time, a symbol information designation command with one designation per probability variation is transmitted, and a probability variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of a variable stop based on these commands. In this way, except when “probability variation 1” is determined, since the non-probability variation symbol is determined as the stop symbol at the time of variation stoppage, the probability variation symbol is derived when the decoration symbol variation stop for the probability of a big hit of 15 rounds. The probability of display is (43) / (32 + 43 + 7 + 15) = 43 / 97≈44.3%.

  As described above, the proportion of specific symbols included in the decorative symbols (the proportion of specific symbols), the probability that the probability variation jackpot is determined relative to the probability of a big hit of 15 rounds (the proportion of probability variation jackpots), and 15 rounds The probability that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed with respect to the probability that the big success symbol representing the big hit is derived and displayed is different from the probability that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed. However, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the type of jackpot regardless of the ratio of specific symbols (step S62), and produces an effect control command (variation pattern command, (Design information designation command) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Then, as will be described later, the production control microcomputer 100 is divided into jackpot types (including the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect) based on the contents of the production control command from the game control microcomputer 560. The corresponding jackpot symbol is determined and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped (see steps S621 and S626). Therefore, it is possible to easily increase / decrease the ratio of a specific symbol according to the specifications of the gaming machine, change the ratio of probability variation big hit, or set a re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts.

  Although not shown in FIG. 20, there is only one special jackpot symbol depending on the jackpot type, so the jackpot symbol is automatically determined by determining the jackpot type. The Specifically, the non-probability variable symbol “6” is determined for a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), the probabilistic variable symbol “7” is determined for a probable big hit, and the sudden probable symbol “5” for a sudden probable big hit. Will be determined.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores (stores) the decorative symbol information corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S62 in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S63), and proceeds to the processing of step S72 of FIG. .

  In step S63, after the decorative symbol information corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer, the decorative symbol command control processing (step S28, FIG. 35) is executed in response to the occurrence of the timer interrupt, and the command set is set. Processing (FIG. 36) is executed, and command transmission processing (FIG. 37) is executed. Thus, a symbol information designation command (normal jackpot designation command, probability variation big hit 1 designation command, probability variation big hit 2 designation command, probability variation big hit 3 designation command, sudden probability variation big hit designation command) corresponding to the big hit type is transmitted. Detailed contents will be described later.

  In step S64 of FIG. 21, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a small hit determination module for determining whether or not to make a small hit based on the value of the big hit determination random number read in step S57 (step S64). . The small hit determination module is a program that compares a small hit determination value determined in advance in the small hit table with a big hit determination random number value, and executes a process of determining a small hit when they match.

  FIGS. 23A and 23B show the distribution ratios of the determination values in the small hit determination table in this embodiment. FIG. 23A shows the distribution ratio of the determination values in the small hit determination table in the low probability state (the normal gaming state and the short time state), and FIG. 23B shows the high probability state (the probability variation state, the probability variation time short state). ) Shows the distribution ratio of determination values in the small hit determination table. As shown in FIGS. 23 (A) and 23 (B), in this embodiment, the number of random numbers for jackpot determination is 65536. That is, the range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535. As described above, the number of big hit determination values is 10 times higher at the time of high probability than at the time of low probability, but the number of small hit determination values is the same for both low probability and high probability. That is, the number of small hit determination values is the same 59 at both low probability and high probability. Therefore, the small hit probability is the same 0.00090 (1 / 1110.8) at the low probability and the high probability. Note that the number of small hit determination values may be increased when the probability is high, and the probability of small hit may be higher when the probability is high.

  If it is determined in the small hit determination module that the small hit is determined (Y in step S65), the decorative symbol information corresponding to the small hit is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S66), and the small hit flag is set. (Step S67). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S68). Although not shown in FIG. 21, when it is determined that a small hit is made, the small hit symbol “4” is automatically determined.

  In step S66, after the decorative symbol information corresponding to the small hit is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer, the decorative symbol command control processing (step S28, FIG. 35) is executed in response to the occurrence of the timer interrupt, and the command set is set. Processing (FIG. 36) is executed, and command transmission processing (FIG. 37) is executed. Thereby, a symbol information designation command (small hit designation command) for designating the small hit is transmitted. Detailed contents will be described later.

  When it is determined in the small hit determination module that the small hit is not made (N in step S65), the game control microcomputer 560 reads the random number for symbol determination (one of the display random numbers) from the random number storage buffer. (Step S69) Based on the value of the read out design determining random number, a process of determining a special design out of design is executed (Step S70). One of the symbols “0” to “3”, “8”, and “9” is determined as the special symbol loss symbol.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the decorative symbol information corresponding to the loss in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S71). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S68).

  In step S72 of FIG. 22, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the jackpot type determined in step S62 is a probable big hit, and if it is not a probable big hit (N in step S72), the type of jackpot Without setting the flag indicating that the process proceeds to step S82.

  When the probability variation big hit is found (Y in step S72), the probability variation big hit flag indicating that the probability variation big hit occurs is set (step S73). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation jackpot is a sudden probability variation jackpot (step S74). If it is a sudden probability change big hit (Y in step S74), a sudden probability change flag indicating that a sudden probability change big hit occurs is set (step S75), and the process proceeds to step S82.

  If it is not suddenly a probable big hit (N in Step S74), it is confirmed whether or not a re-lottery effect is executed (Step S76). When the re-lottery effect is not executed (N in Step S76), the process proceeds to Step S82. When the re-lottery effect is executed (Y in Step S76), the re-drawing effect is executed. A lottery execution flag is set (step S77), and it is confirmed whether the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit (step S78). When the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit (Y in step S78), the big hit execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big win is set (step S79), and the process proceeds to step S82. To do. When it is not executed during the big hit (N in Step S78), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (Step S80). When the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (Y in step S80), an ending execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending is set (step S81), and the process proceeds to step S82. . In step S82, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S82).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S201). When the big hit flag is set (Y in step S201), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the sudden probability change flag is set (step S202). When the sudden probability variation flag is set (Y in step S202), since sudden probability variation big hit occurs, it is determined to use the variation pattern determination table for sudden probability variation (step S203).

  In the variation pattern determination table for sudden probability variation, variation patterns (variation numbers “122” to “124”) selected at the time of the sudden probability variation big hit shown in FIG. Is assigned.

  When the probability change flag is not set suddenly (N in step S202), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability change big hit flag is set (step S204A). When the probability variation big hit flag is set (Y in step S204A), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery execution flag is set (step S204B). When the probability variation jackpot flag is set and the re-lottery execution flag is not set (N in step S204B), a probability variation jackpot that does not execute the re-lottery effect occurs after the big-hit game starts, so the variation pattern for probability variation jackpot It is decided to use the decision table (step S205).

  In the variation pattern determination table for probability variation big hit, variation patterns (variation numbers “42” to “114”) selected at the time of probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 are set in advance. A judgment value is assigned.

  When the probability variation big hit flag is not set (N in step S204A), since a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) occurs, it is decided to use the normal big hit variation pattern determination table (step S206). In addition, although the probability variation jackpot flag is set, if the re-lottery execution flag is also set (Y in step S204B), a probability variation jackpot that executes the re-lottery effect after the big-hit game starts occurs. In this case, since a non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, it is usually necessary to select a variation pattern for jackpot. Therefore, it is decided to use the normal big hit variation pattern determination table (step S206).

  In the normal big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (variation numbers “87” to “121”) selected in advance for the normal big hit shown in FIG. 19 are set in advance, and a plurality of determination values are set for each variation pattern. Assigned.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and based on the value of the read variation pattern determination random number, sudden variation variation determination table for probability variation, variation pattern determination table for probability variation big hit or normal A symbol variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table (step S207). Specifically, the variation pattern corresponding to the determination value that matches the variation pattern determination random value is determined as the variation pattern of the symbol to be variably displayed next. Then, the process proceeds to step S213.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the big hit flag is not set (N in step S201), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S208). When the small hit flag is set (Y in step S208), since a small hit occurs, it is decided to use the small hit variation pattern determination table (step S209).

  In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, variation patterns (variation numbers “122” and “123”) selected in advance for small hits shown in FIG. Assigned.

  When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S208), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S210). When the time reduction flag is not set (N in step S210), it is determined to use the normal time deviation variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state (step S211).

  In the normal time deviation variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (variation numbers “1”, “3”, “5” to “41”) selected in advance in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. A plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  On the other hand, when the hour / hour flag is set (Y in step S210), it is decided to use the hour / hour deviation variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state (step S212).

  The variation pattern determination table for time-shifting deviation includes a variation pattern (variation numbers “2”, “4” to “41”) that is selected in the time-short state (including the probability variation short-time state) shown in FIG. ) Is set, and a plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  Then, as described above, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and based on the read variation pattern determination random number value, the small hit variation pattern determination table, normal time The variation pattern of the symbol is determined using the variation pattern determination table for deviation or the variation pattern determination table for deviation at the time reduction (step S207). Then, the process proceeds to step S213.

  In the case of the probability variation state, the variation pattern determination table for deviation is used in the normal time as in the normal gaming state, and in the case of the probability variation short state, the variation pattern for deviation in the time reduction is similar to that in the time reduction state. A variation table is determined using the determination table.

  In step S213, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the variation pattern command data corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S207 in the variation pattern buffer (step S213). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation time in the special symbol process timer (step S214). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the address of the variable command transmission table in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S215). In response to this processing being performed, control for transmitting the variation pattern command is executed in the decorative symbol command control processing (step S28 in FIG. 12, FIG. 35). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the variation number monitoring process (step S216).

  In the fluctuation count monitoring process, the game control microcomputer 560 is changed to a short-time state (except for the short-time state at the time of probability change) after the big hit game ends (when the short-time flag is set), a special symbol after the big hit game ends. The number of fluctuations is counted with a fluctuation number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the count value of the fluctuation count counter has reached a value indicating a predetermined fluctuation count (for example, 100) that can continue the short-time state, and the count value is the predetermined fluctuation count. When the value becomes, the hourly flag is reset. As a result, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the big hit game ends becomes a predetermined number of fluctuations, the time-shifted state is shifted to the normal gaming state.

  Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302) (step S217).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, first, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special symbol process timer by -1 (step S351). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer has expired (that is, whether or not the value of the special symbol process timer is 0) (step S352), and if it has not expired (N in step S352) ) And the process is terminated. If the special symbol process timer has expired (Y in step S352), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S303) (step S353).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and derives and displays the stop symbol (step S361). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the decorative symbol stop designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S362), and executes the command setting process (step S363). As a result, control for transmitting a decorative symbol stop designation command is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S364). If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S364), the game control microcomputer 560 stops the jackpot symbol in the jackpot control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot. The time from the display until the big winning opening is released (a big hit display time) is set (step S365). In the jackpot display time, an effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the player that the jackpot game is started is executed.

  Note that different jackpot display times may be set for the big hit of 15 rounds and the big hit of 2 rounds. In this case, for example, the jackpot display time is 3 seconds for a big hit of 15 rounds, and the jackpot display time is 5 seconds for a big hit of two rounds.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the fanfare command transmission table corresponding to the jackpot type to the pointer (step S366), and executes the command setting process (step S367). Thereby, control for transmitting a fanfare command corresponding to the jackpot type is executed. For the big hit type, the probability change big hit flag is set, suddenly the probability change flag is set, the re-draw lotion execution flag is set, the big hit execution flag is set, or the ending execution flag is set It can be confirmed based on whether or not. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S304) (step S368).

  If the big hit flag is not set (N in step S364), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S369). If the small win flag is set (Y in step S369), the game control microcomputer 560 displays the time from when the small winning symbol is stopped displayed to the big prize opening control timer until the big prize opening is released ( The small hit display time) is set (step S370).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the small hit fanfare command transmission table in the pointer (step S371), and executes the command setting process (step S372). Thereby, control for transmitting a fanfare command for small hitting is executed. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S373).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S369), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S374).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (step S304). In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by 1 (step S401), and confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 ( Step S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S402), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S402), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the number of big hits is 15 rounds or 2 rounds (step S403). ). If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, or if the probability variation jackpot flag is set but suddenly the probability variation flag is not set, it can be determined that the round is a big hit of 15 rounds. When the probability variation flag is set, it can be determined that the game is a big hit of two rounds.

  If it is a big hit for 15 rounds (Y in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command sending table for the 15 round big hits in the big prize opening opening command pointer to the pointer (step S404), and sets the command. Is executed (step S405). As a result, control is performed to transmit a large winning opening opening command for 15 rounds that designates a display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the large winning opening (during round). The number of rounds is recognized by checking the value of a round number counter that counts the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S406). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, and the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the RAM area corresponds to the output state of the output port in step S406. Is set in accordance with the open / close state of the solenoid to be driven. Then, the contents set in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port in the output process of step S32 are output to the output port. As a result, a drive command signal is output from the output port to the solenoid circuit 59. The solenoid circuit 59 outputs a drive signal for driving the solenoid in response to a drive command signal to drive the solenoid. Hereinafter, in the process of opening and closing the solenoid, such an operation is performed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S407). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S407, in steps S404 and S405, when the value of the round number counter is 0, a command for opening the big prize opening indicating the first round is transmitted. The process of S407 may be executed before the process of step S404, and when the value of the round number counter is 1, a command for opening a big prize opening indicating the first round may be transmitted.

  In addition, the maximum time (15-round round time) that can be opened in each round of the 15 round big hits is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S408). The round time for 15 rounds is, for example, 29.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S414).

  When it is a big hit of two rounds in step S403 (N in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command winning table during the big winning opening release command for the two rounds big hit in the pointer (step S409). ), Command set processing is executed (step S410). As a result, a control is executed to transmit a two-round big prize opening opening command for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to release the special winning opening (step S411) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S412). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S412, in steps S409 and S410, when the value of the round number counter is 0, a command for opening the big prize opening indicating the first round is transmitted. The process of S412 may be executed before the process of step S409, and when the value of the round number counter is 1, a command for opening the big prize opening indicating the first round may be transmitted. In addition, the maximum time for which the big prize opening can be opened in each round in the big hit of two rounds (round time for two rounds) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S413). The round time for 2 rounds is a short time, for example, 5 seconds. Therefore, in the big hit of two rounds, ten game balls (the maximum number of game balls that can be won) will not win the big prize opening during the round. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S414).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process (step S305) in the special symbol process. In the special winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the special winning prize control timer by -1 (step S421). And it is confirmed whether the number of big hits is 15 rounds (whether it is a big hit of 15 rounds or a big hit of 2 rounds) (step S422).

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds (Y in step S422), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S423). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S423), it is checked whether or not the game ball has won the big prize opening by checking whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. Confirmation is made (step S424). If the count switch 23 is not turned on (N in step S424), the process is terminated as it is. If the count switch 23 is on (Y in step S424), the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the winning number counter that counts the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S425). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S426). If the value of the winning number counter is not the predetermined number (N in step S426), the process is ended as it is.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S423) or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S426), the game control microcomputer 560 is Then, the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S427). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S428).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command transmission table after opening the big winning opening for 15 rounds big hit to the pointer (step S429), and executes the command setting process (step S430). As a result, control for transmitting a command after opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds that specifies a display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the end of the round) is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a time (interval time for 15 rounds) from the end of the round to the start of the next round in the big win of 15 rounds in the big prize opening control timer ( In step S431), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) (step S432). The interval time for 15 rounds is, for example, 5 seconds.

  If it is a big hit of two rounds (N in step S422), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (step S433), and the value of the big prize control timer If is not 0 (N in step S433), the process is terminated as it is. When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S433), the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the big prize opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S434).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the display command transmission table after the two-round big winning opening is opened to the pointer (step S435), and executes the command setting process (step S436). As a result, the control for transmitting a command after opening the big winning opening for two rounds for specifying the display state according to the number of rounds after the opening of the big winning opening (after the end of the round) is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the time from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval time for two rounds) in the big winning prize control timer in the big prize opening control timer ( In step S437), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) (step S432). The interval time for 2 rounds is the same as the interval time for 15 rounds, for example, 5 seconds.

  FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening post-process (step S306) in the special symbol process. In the post-opening process for the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S441), and checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 or not. (Step S442). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S442), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S442), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the number of rounds is 15 rounds (15 rounds or 2 rounds Is determined (step S443).

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds (Y in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 15 (step S444). If the value of the round number counter is not 15 (N in Step S444), the address of the command transmission table for the 15 round round big prize opening open command transmission table is set in the pointer (Step S445), and the command setting process is executed. (Step S446). As a result, control is performed to transmit a large winning opening opening command for 15 rounds that designates a display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the large winning opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) by driving the solenoid 21 (step S447) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S448). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S448, the value of the round number counter indicates the number of rounds to be started next minus 1 at the time of the processing in steps S445 and S446. However, if the process of step S448 is executed before the processes of steps S445 and S446, the value of the round number counter indicates the number of rounds to be started next at the time of the processes of steps S445 and S446. Can be.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a round time for 15 rounds in the special winning opening control timer (step S449). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S450).

  If the value of the round counter is 15 (Y in step S444), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the ending command transmission table corresponding to the jackpot type in the pointer (step S451), and sets the command Processing is executed (step S452). Thereby, control for transmitting an ending command corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the jackpot end time (execution time of the ending effect) for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot in the jackpot control timer (step S453), and sets the value of the special symbol process flag. The value is updated according to the big hit end process (step S307) (step S454).

  When the big hit end time is set in step S453, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the re-drawing effect is executed during the ending by checking whether the ending execution flag is set, and re-draws during the ending. When the effect is not executed, a shorter time than the case where the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending is set as the jackpot end time (end effect execution time). For example, 10 seconds is set as the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect, and 3 seconds is set as the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect. Thus, when it is not necessary to notify the transition to the probable change state by making the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect shorter than the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect In addition, it is possible to avoid that the production is unnecessarily performed for a long time.

  When it is a big hit of two rounds in step S443 (N in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S455 in FIG. 30). If the value of the round counter is not 2 (N in Step S455), the address of the command transmission table for the 2 round big hit big winning opening is set in the pointer (Step S456), and the command setting process is executed. (Step S457). As a result, a control is executed to transmit a two-round big prize opening opening command for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to release the special winning opening (step S458) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S459). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S459, the value of the round number counter indicates the number of rounds to be started next minus 1 at the time of the processing in steps S456 and S457. However, if the process of step S459 is executed before the processes of steps S456 and S457, the value of the round number counter indicates the number of rounds to be started next at the time of the processes of steps S456 and S457. Can be. Further, the round time for two rounds is set in the special winning opening control timer (step S460). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S461).

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S455), the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly sets the address of the ending command transmission table for the probability variation big hit in the pointer (step S462), and sets the command. Processing is executed (step S463). As a result, the control for suddenly transmitting the ending command for probability variation big hit is executed. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the jackpot end time in the big prize opening control timer (step S464), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S307) (step S307). S465).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit ending process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S471). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S472). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S472), the process is terminated as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S472), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a game state setting process after the big hit (step S473).

  In the game state setting process after the big hit, the process of setting / resetting the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag corresponding to the game state after the big hit game is completed is executed. Specifically, when the gaming state is shifted to the short-time state after the big hit game is finished, only the short-time flag is set. When the gaming state is shifted to the probability change time-short state after the game ends, the probability change flag and the time-short flag are set.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the jackpot flag (step S474). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset (step S475), and the sudden probability variation flag is set. In this case, the probability variation flag is suddenly reset (step S476). If the re-lottery execution flag is set, the re-lottery execution flag is reset (step S477). If the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit execution is executed. The flag is reset (step S478). Further, if the ending execution flag is set, the ending execution flag is reset (step S479).

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S480).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release pre-processing, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by 1 (step S501), and checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step). S502). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S502), the process is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S502), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S503). If the value of the round number counter is not 2 (N in step S503), the solenoid 21 is driven to control to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S504), and the value of the round number counter Is incremented by 1 (step S505).

  In addition, the maximum time (round time for small hits) in which the big winning opening can be opened in each round in the small hit is set in the big winning opening control timer (step S506). Note that the round time for small hits is the same as the round time for two rounds (for example, 5 seconds). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit releasing process (step S309) (step S507).

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S503), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small hit end time for notifying the player of the end of the small hit in the big prize opening control timer. (Step S508), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end processing (Step S310) (Step S509).

  In addition, during the small hit game, the control for transmitting the special winning opening open command is not executed.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the small hit releasing process (step S309) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release processing, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S511). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S512). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S512), the processing is ended as it is. When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S512), the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to close the big prize opening (opening / closing plate 20). (Step S513).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a time from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval time for small hits) in the small winning of the two rounds in the big prize control timer. (Step S514), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (Step S308) (Step S515). The interval time for small hits is, for example, 5 seconds.

  During the small hit game, the control for transmitting the command after the big winning opening is released is not executed.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S310) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S531). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S532). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S532), the process is terminated. If the value of the big prize winning control timer is 0 (Y in step S532), the game control microcomputer 560 resets the small hit flag (step S533) and sets the special symbol process flag value to the special symbol normal symbol. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the process (step S300) (step S534).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol command control process (step S28). In the decorative symbol command control process, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer onto the pointer (step S551), and loads the data pointed to by the pointer (step S552). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is the timing for transmitting the variation pattern command, the address of the variation command transmission table is stored in the decoration symbol command transmission pointer in step S215 of the variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process (step S26). The data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the variable command transmission table. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether or not it is the timing to transmit the variation pattern command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the variation command transmission table.

  When it is time to transmit the variation pattern command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). As a result, control for transmitting the variation pattern command is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  At this time, in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 36) executed in step S554, the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, so that the address pointed to by the pointer is changed from the address of the variable command transmission table to the symbol information designation command. This is the address of the transmission table. Accordingly, in step S555, the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer.

  In the decorative symbol command control processing when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer again to the pointer (step S551), and stores the data pointed to by the pointer. It is loaded (step S552), and it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is time to transmit the symbol information designation command, in step S555, the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, and the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table. It has become. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether or not it is the timing to transmit the symbol information designation command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table.

  When it is time to transmit the symbol information designation command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). As a result, control for transmitting a symbol information designation command is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  At this time, in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 36) executed in step S554, the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, so that the address pointed to by the pointer starts from the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table. This is the address of the storage designation command transmission table. Accordingly, in step S555, the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer.

  In the decorative symbol command control processing when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer again to the pointer (step S551), and stores the data pointed to by the pointer. It is loaded (step S552), and it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is time to transmit the start winning memory designation command, in step S555, the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, and the data pointed to by the pointer is transmitted to the start winning memory designation command. It is the address of the table. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether it is the timing to transmit the start winning memory designation command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table. .

  When it is time to transmit the start winning memory designation command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). Thereby, control for transmitting the start winning memory designation command is executed. The start prize memory designation command is an effect control command for designating (notifying) the current start prize memory number (holding memory number). The start prize memory number is confirmed in the storage process (step S33), and The number is set as a value designated by the start winning memory designation command. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  In this case, when 1 is added to the address of the command transmission table in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 36) executed in step S554, the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command by the address indicated by the pointer. The address is not shown. Accordingly, in the decorative symbol command control process when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the decorative symbol command transmission pointer is loaded again into the pointer (step S551), and the data pointed to by the pointer is loaded (step S552). Whether or not it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command is determined (step S553), but it is determined in step S553 that it is not the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing command set processing. As described above, the command set process is executed in steps S56, S363, S367, S372, S405, S410, S430, S436, S446, S452, S457, S463, and S554. The command set process is a process including a command output process and an INT signal output process.

  In the command set process, the game control microcomputer 560 first loads the command data 1 pointed to by the address in the command transmission table (step S561), and executes (calls) the command transmission process shown in FIG. 37 (step S562). .

  In the command transmission process shown in FIG. 37, the game control microcomputer 560 first outputs a transmission command (effect control command) to the output port 1 (step S581). As a result, the MODE data of the first byte in the production control command having a 2-byte structure is output from the output port 1.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the effect control signal INT output bit in the port buffer (step S582), and loads the port 2 buffer (step S583). In this embodiment, for example, “1” is set in the port buffer as an effect control signal INT output bit, and data “0” in the port 2 buffer is loaded. Then, the logical sum of the port 2 buffer and the port buffer is calculated (step S584), and the calculation result is output to the output port 2 (step S585). In this embodiment, when the calculation result is “1”, an on-state (high level) effect control INT signal is output from the output port 2. In response to the output of the on-state effect control INT signal, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process of receiving (capturing) a transmission command.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a predetermined value in the wait counter (step S586), and subtracts one by one until the value becomes 0 (steps S587, S588). This process is a process for setting the ON period (high level period) of the effect control INT signal. When the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (Y in step S588), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the port 2 buffer (step S589) and outputs the port 2 buffer to the output port 2 (step S590). As a result, an effect control INT signal in the off state (low level) is output from the output port 2.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a predetermined value in the wait counter (step S591), and subtracts one by one until the value becomes 0 (steps S592, S593). This process is a process for setting the off period (low level period) of the effect control INT signal. When the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (Y in step S593), the process returns to the command set process in FIG.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 36, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the address of the command transmission table (step S563). Then, the address of the command transmission table is saved in the stack or the like (step S564).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 tests the work area reference designation bit (bit 7) of the command data 2 (step S565), and determines whether or not the value of the work area reference designation bit of the command data 2 is “0”. Is determined (step S566). If it is not 0 (N in step S566), the head address of the command extended data address table is set in the pointer (step S567), and the address is calculated by adding the value of bit 6 to bit 0 of the command data 2 to the pointer. (Step S568). Then, the data (command extension data) in the area pointed to by the address (pointer) is loaded (step S569).

  In the command extended data address table, EXT data (second byte data in a 2-byte effect control command) that can be sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 is sequentially set. Therefore, if the value of the work area reference designation bit is “1” by the above processing, the EXT data in the command extended data address table corresponding to the contents of the command data 2 is loaded, and the value of the work area reference designation bit is If "0", the contents of the command data 2 are loaded as they are. Even when EXT data is read from the command extension data address table, bit 7 of the data is “0”.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (calls) a command transmission processing routine (step S570). Therefore, by the processing shown in FIG. 37, the EXT data and the effect control INT signal are transmitted at the same timing as the transmission of the MODE data. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 restores the address of the command transmission table (step S571), and adds 1 to the address of the command transmission table (step S572). When the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, if the address is the address of the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command, as described above, the decorative symbol command control process performs the decorative symbol command control processing. If the transmission process (command set process) is executed and the address is not the address of the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative design command, the decorative design command transmission process (command set process) is not executed in the decorative design command control process.

  As described above, the production control command having a 2-byte structure is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. In the effect control microcomputer 100, when the rising of the effect control INT signal as the capture signal is detected, the effect control command capturing process is started. Before the capture process is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 A new signal is not output to the signal line. That is, reliable command reception processing is performed in the production control microcomputer 100. The effect control microcomputer 100 may start the effect control command capturing process at the fall of the effect control INT signal. Also, the polarity of the effect control INT signal may be reversed (it may be at a low level when instructing command capture).

  Next, the transmission timing of each effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. As shown in FIG. 38, every time a start winning occurs and variable symbol display is started on the special symbol display 8, the background designation command corresponding to the gaming state is displayed in the special symbol normal processing (step S300). Is sent. Also, in the special symbol normal process (step S300), the type of big hit is determined when it is out of place, big hit, small hit or big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command designating the determined variation pattern is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28). Subsequently, in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28), the symbol information designation command corresponding to the losing, big hit (big hit type) and small hit determined in the special symbol normal process is transmitted, and the start winning memory designation command is further transmitted. (The start winning memory designation command at this time is a command indicating that the start winning memory number has been decremented by -1 due to the start of fluctuation). In the example shown in FIG. 38, an effect control command for designating a big hit variation pattern is transmitted as the variation pattern command, and an effect control command for designating 15 rounds of big hit as the symbol information designation command (sudden probability change big hit and small hit It is assumed that an effect control command other than a command for designating is transmitted. Then, the special symbol variation time is measured in the special symbol variation processing (step S302).

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 shows a variation pattern dedicated to a loss, a variation pattern dedicated to a probable jackpot, a variation pattern dedicated to a normal jackpot, and a variation pattern dedicated to a sudden probability variation jackpot. If it is a variation pattern command, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 is determined based on the command. On the other hand, if the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit or sudden variation / big hit / small hit, the pattern information received thereafter. Based on the designation command, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 is determined.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable display device 9 based on the reception of the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In addition, when the execution of the re-lottery effect is designated by the received variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect during the variable display of the decorative symbols on the variable display device 9.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether it is a loss or a big hit or a small hit based on the symbol information designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. The presence / absence of execution and the execution timing are also confirmed.

  In the special symbol stop process (step S303), when the special symbol change time has elapsed, a decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted. When receiving the decoration symbol stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the already determined decoration symbol stop symbol.

  If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, a fanfare command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted in the special symbol stop process (step S303). Based on the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a fanfare effect informing the start of the big hit game on the variable display device 9.

  In the big prize opening pre-processing (step S304), when the jackpot display time elapses, the big prize opening is opened, and a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the first round display is transmitted. The The production control microcomputer 100 displays the round display of the first round on the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the round time elapses in the process for opening the special prize opening (step S305), the special prize opening is closed, and a command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds specifying the interval display after the first round is transmitted. The The production control microcomputer 100 displays an interval display on the variable display device 9 until the next round (second round) is started based on the command after the big winning opening is opened from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the interval time elapses in the post-opening process for the special winning opening (step S306), the special winning opening is opened and a command for opening the special winning opening for 15 rounds specifying the round display of the second round is transmitted. . The production control microcomputer 100 displays the round display of the second round on the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  By repeatedly executing the process during opening of the special winning opening and the process after opening the special winning opening as described above, the round display of each round and the interval display between rounds are displayed, and the round advances in order. In the special symbol normal process (step S300), when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit game, it is repeated during a predetermined round (15th round in the example of FIG. 38). A lottery effect is executed.

  In the fifteenth round winning opening opening post-process (step S306), when the interval time has elapsed, an ending command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted. On the basis of the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes an ending effect informing that the jackpot game has ended on the variable display device 9. In the special symbol normal process (step S300), when it is determined to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending, the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (in the ending effect). In the example shown in FIG. 38, the re-lottery effect is also executed in the ending effect. The re-lottery effect may be executed a plurality of times after the big hit game is started, but in this embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started, it is always promoted to a probable big hit. It will be executed only once. Therefore, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, the re-lottery effect is not executed during the ending.

  Thereafter, in the big hit end process (step S307), when the big hit end time has elapsed, after the big hit game state setting process etc. is executed, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again, and the special symbol change starts. Is done.

  FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when a two-round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game) and a small hit game are executed. As in the case shown in FIG. 38, every time a start prize is generated and variable symbol display is started on the special symbol display 8, the special symbol normal process (step S300) is performed according to the gaming state. A background specification command is sent. Also, in the special symbol normal process (step S300), the type of big hit is determined when it is out of place, big hit, small hit or big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command designating the determined variation pattern is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28). Subsequently, in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28), the symbol information designation command corresponding to the losing, big hit (big hit type) and small hit determined in the special symbol normal process is transmitted, and the start winning memory designation command is further transmitted. Is sent. In the example shown in FIG. 39, an effect control command for designating a variation pattern for sudden probability change or small hit as a variation pattern command is transmitted, and an effect control command for designating sudden probability change big hit or small hit as a symbol information designation command. Is sent. Then, the special symbol variation time is measured in the special symbol variation processing (step S302).

  If the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern dedicated to the probability variation big hit, the presentation control microcomputer 100 stops and displays the variable display device 9 on the basis of the command. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined. On the other hand, if the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a sudden variation / big hit / small variation variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 can change the variation based on the symbol information designation command received thereafter. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display device 9 is determined.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable display device 9 based on the reception of the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 suddenly confirms the probability change big hit or the small hit based on the symbol information designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. It should be noted that the re-lottery effect is not executed in the case of suddenly big hits and small hits.

  In the special symbol stop process (step S303), when the special symbol change time has elapsed, a decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted. When receiving the decoration symbol stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the already determined decoration symbol stop symbol.

  If the special symbol stop symbol is a sudden probability variation symbol, a fanfare command designating the start of sudden probability variation jackpot is transmitted in the special symbol suspension process (step S303). If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a small hit symbol, a fanfare command designating the start of the small hit is transmitted in the special symbol stop process (step S303). The production control microcomputer 100 suddenly starts a probable large hit game or a small hit game based on the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560. When suddenly probable big hit games or small hit games are started suddenly, a two-round effect is executed. The effect for two rounds is a series of special effects that are executed from the start to the end of the sudden change big hit game or the small hit game. For example, when a suddenly probable symbol or a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol for a decorative symbol, a special two-round effect such as suddenly appearing a character or playing a movie image is started. When the two-round production ends, the production mode shifts to a chance mode in which the transition of the probability change state is expected.

  When the probability change big hit game is suddenly started, in the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304), when the big winning display time elapses, the big winning opening is opened and the display state at the first round is designated. A command for opening a big prize opening for two rounds is sent. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the round time elapses in the process for opening the big prize opening (step S305), the big prize opening is closed, and a command after opening the big prize opening for two rounds that specifies the display state after the first round is transmitted. Is done. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for the two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command after the special winning opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the interval time elapses in the post-opening process for the big prize opening (step S306), the big prize opening is opened and a command for opening the big prize opening for the second round that specifies the display state at the second round is displayed. Sent. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the second round big opening opening process (step S305), when the round time elapses, the big winning opening is closed and the big winning opening for two rounds big hit that specifies the display state after the second round is designated. A command is sent after release. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for the two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command after the special winning opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the post-opening process for the special winning opening after the second round (step S306), when the interval time elapses, an ending command for designating the end of the sudden probability change big hit is transmitted. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Thereafter, in the big hit end process (step S307), when the big hit end time has elapsed, after the big hit game state setting process etc. is executed, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again, and the special symbol change starts. Is done.

  When the small hit game is started, the big winning opening is opened when the small hit display time has elapsed in the small hit release pre-processing (step S308).

  In the small hit opening process (step S309), when the round time elapses, the big prize opening is closed.

  In the pre-opening process for small hits after the first round (step S308), when the interval time elapses, the big winning opening is opened.

  In the second round small hit opening process (step S309), when the round time elapses, the big prize opening is closed.

  In the pre-opening process for small hits after the second round (step S308), when the interval time has elapsed, the process proceeds to a small hitting end process.

  Thereafter, in the small hit end process (step S310), when the small hit end time has elapsed, after resetting the small hit flag, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again to start the change of the special symbol. Is done.

  In addition, during the round in the small hit game (similarly in the sudden probability change big hit game), the opening time (round time) of the big prize opening is short. For this reason, since 10 game balls do not win the big winning opening, the big winning opening is not closed within the round time. Accordingly, since the time from the start to the end of the game is constant, the display control state of the effect for two rounds is not based on the presentation control microcomputer 100 receiving the command for opening the big prize opening or the command after opening the big prize opening. Can be switched. Therefore, in the small hit game, the game control microcomputer 560 does not perform the process of transmitting the special winning opening opening command or the special winning opening open command. Note that even in the case of a sudden probability big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 may not perform a process of transmitting a command for opening a special prize opening or a command after opening a special prize opening.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. The production control microcomputer 100 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the start interval of the effect control processing (step S701). Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to a loop process for confirming the monitoring of the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control microcomputer 100 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the variable display device 9 is executed. In addition, various random numbers for determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the random symbol for determining the left symbol extracted by the non-reach loss determination process, the random symbol for determining the right symbol, the random symbol for determining the middle symbol, the random number for determining the chance eye, the reach) A random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a reach symbol determination random number or a chance eye determination random number extracted in the lost determination process is executed (step S706). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  41 to 43 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing (step S704) in the main processing. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (background specifying command: 9500 (H) to 9503 (H)) for specifying the background in the variable display device 9 (Y in step S613), the effect control microcomputer 100 is used. Confirms the gaming state based on the content of the background designation command, and sets the confirmed gaming state in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S614). And the control which displays the background image according to a game state on the variable display apparatus 9 is performed (step S615).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 807B (H)) for designating a change pattern (step S616), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the command EXT. Data is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S617), and a fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S618).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit (step S619), and a variation pattern for both common big hit / probable variation big hit. If it is not a variation pattern command for designating (N in step S619), it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is for designating a variation pattern for both sudden and promising large hit / small hit (step S620). If the variation pattern command is not a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern for both sudden and promising large hits / small hits (N in step S620), the first decorative symbol determination process is executed (step S621). The detailed contents of the first decorative symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 44). When the variation pattern command is for designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit (Y in step S619), or for the variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern for sudden probability variation big hit / small hit (in step S620). Y) A combined flag indicating that a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit or sudden variation for sudden big variation / small hit is received is set (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (symbol information specifying command: 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H)) for specifying symbol information (Y in step S623), the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the symbol control. A symbol information command reception flag indicating that the information designation command has been received is set (step S624). And it is confirmed whether the stop symbol of a decoration symbol has already been determined (step S625A). Here, if the variation pattern command is not a command for specifying a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable big hit or sudden variation for big hit / small hit, a stop symbol of the decorative symbol has already been set in the first decorative symbol determination process. It has been decided. Therefore, it can be confirmed whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol has already been determined depending on whether or not the dual-purpose flag is set.

  When the decorative symbol stop symbol has not yet been determined (N in step S625A), the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the second decorative symbol determination process (step S626). The detailed contents of the second decorative symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 63). When the decorative symbol stop symbol has already been determined (Y in step S625A), the production control microcomputer 100 executes the redrawing effect after the symbol information designation command is a big hit, and promotes the non-probable variation symbol to the certain variation symbol. It is confirmed whether it is a command that designates to be performed, that is, a two-specific command per probability variation (8C03 (H)) or a three-specific command (8C04 (H)) per probability variation large (step S625B). If it is a symbol information designation command that designates promotion after a big win (Y in step S625B), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that a re-lottery effect is executed after the big win ( Step S625C). If it is a command with 2 probable big hits, a re-lottery effect execution flag is set to indicate that a re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big win. Set an ending re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that this is to be done. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S625D), and uses the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 68 in accordance with the extracted random number value. Is determined and stored (step S625E). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect executed after the big hit game is started. The contents of the common jackpot symbol selection table will be described later.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (start winning memory designation command: C0XX (H)) that designates the starting winning memory number (Y in step S627), the start winning memory display control process is executed (step S627). S628). The start winning memory display control process is a process for performing a control for displaying a display (start winning memory display) that can specify the start winning memory number in a predetermined area of the variable display device 9. In this process, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms the number of start winning memories based on the start winning memory designation command, and displays the confirmed number of start winning memories on the variable display device 9.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the start prize memory designation command is a start prize memory designation command for designating the start prize memory number -1 transmitted at the start of variation, that is, in the decorative symbol command control process. It is determined whether the start winning memory designation command is transmitted next to the symbol information designation command (step S629). Here, whether or not it is a start prize memory designation command for designating the start prize memory number −1, for example, in the start prize memory display control process, stores the start prize memory number designated by the start prize memory designation command. The determination can be made by checking whether or not the number of start winning memories specified by the next received start winning memory specifying command is -1. If it is not the start winning memory designation command for designating the starting winning memory number −1 (N in Step S629), the process returns to Step S611. If it is the start winning memory designation command for designating the starting winning memory number −1 (Y in step S629), the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the symbol information command reception flag is set (step S630). If the flag is set (Y in step S630), it means that the symbol information designation command has been successfully received before the start winning memory designation command, and the process returns to step S611.

  If the symbol information command reception flag is not set (N in step S630), it indicates that the symbol information designation command has not been received normally before the start winning memory designation command. That is, it means that the symbol information designation command is missed in the production control microcomputer 100. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol stop symbol has already been determined in step S621 (step S631), and if it has already been determined (Y in step S631), the step S611 is performed. Return to processing. If the decorative symbol stop symbol has not yet been determined (N in step S631), a provisionally determined symbol determination process is executed (step S632). Temporarily determined symbol determination processing, when a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot is received, but when a symbol information designation command is missed, a non-probable variation symbol is provisionally determined, and suddenly variation variation command command for sudden variation / big hit combination is used. Is received, but when the symbol information designation command is missed, the small hit symbol is temporarily determined. The detailed contents of the temporary determination symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 81).

  In addition to the case where the symbol information designation command is missed, the symbol information designation command is not completely received, that is, the MODE data and the EXT data of the symbol information designation command cannot be received. Also included is a case of receiving a command that is not a symbol information designation command, such as a garbled command. For example, when the MODE data of the symbol information specifying command is garbled, a command that is not a symbol information specifying command (including a command that cannot be recognized by the production control microcomputer 100) is received, or the symbol information specifying command EXT is received. This is the case, for example, when an EXT data command (see FIG. 15) that is not defined as a symbol information designation command is received because the data is garbled.

  The EXT data of the symbol information specifying command is garbled. However, when a command defined as the symbol information specifying command is received, the symbol information specifying command is an inconsistent symbol information specifying command in the control process. It will be received. In this case, when the effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes that the symbol information designation command has been received, the symbol information command reception flag is set (step S624), and the flag is set in step S630 (step S630). There is a possibility that the provisionally determined symbol determination process is not executed (Y in S630) (step S632). However, if the garbled symbol information designation command is a command other than the normal jackpot designation command (8C01 (H)) or the probable variation jackpot designation command (8C02 (H) to 8C04 (H)), the decorative symbol has not yet been determined. Although there is no symbol (N in step S631), it is possible to determine that the variation pattern command and the symbol information specifying command are not matched by receiving such a symbol information specifying command. In such a case, it is preferable to execute a provisionally determined symbol determination process (step S632).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (fanfare command: A000 (H) to A004 (H), A600 (H)) that specifies the start of a big hit or a small hit (fanfare) (Y in step S633). The production control microcomputer 100 sets a fanfare reception flag corresponding to the content of the fanfare command (step S634). For example, depending on the contents of the fanfare command (such as the type of jackpot), a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of a normal jackpot, a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of a promiscuous jackpot (no re-lottering effect), a probability variable jackpot (re-lottery effect during a jackpot) Fanfare reception flag indicating the start of execution), fanfare reception flag indicating the start of probability variation big hit (execution of re-draw lottery with ending), fanfare reception flag indicating the start of sudden probability variation big hit, fanfare reception flag indicating the start of small hit To do.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not a command non-reception flag indicating that the symbol information designation command has not been received is set (step S635). The command non-reception flag is set in the temporary determination symbol determination process (see step S685 in FIG. 81). At this time, if the command not received flag is set, it means that the normal pattern of big hit / probable variation big hit combined fluctuation pattern command or sudden probability variation big hit / small hit combined variation pattern command has been received, but the symbol information designation command is Since it is not received and it cannot be determined whether it is a probable big hit or normal big hit, or suddenly it is not possible to judge whether it is a probable big hit or a small hit, so the stop design of the decorative symbol is not decided This means that the stop symbol is temporarily determined).

  When the command non-reception flag is not set (N of step S635), the process returns to step S611. When the command non-reception flag is set (Y in step S635), it is confirmed whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit (excluding the sudden probable big hit) based on the fanfare reception flag or the like (step S636). If it is not a probable big hit (N in step S636), the process returns to step S611. If it is a probable big hit (Y in step S636), the production control microcomputer 100 executes a third probable symbol determination process for determining a probable symbol as a decorative symbol stop symbol (step S637). Detailed contents of the third probability variation symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 82). The probability variation symbol determined and stored in the third probability variation symbol determination process is derived from the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game when the command non-reception flag is set (when the symbol information designation command is not yet received). It is the last stop symbol displayed.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game based on the fanfare reception flag (step S638). Even if it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect, that is, even if the fanfare command designating the execution of the re-lottery effect is not received during the big hit or the ending (N in step S638), the re-lottery effect is performed. Must be executed. This is because when a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot is received but no symbol information designation command is received, a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a temporary jackpot symbol in the provisional symbol determination process (see FIG. 81). ), Since the non-probable variation symbol has already been derived and displayed, if the true jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (excluding sudden probability variation jackpots), the probability variation symbol is re-established so as not to disadvantage the player. This is because it is necessary to derive and display the lottery effect. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts the execution timing determination random number (step S639), and determines the re-lottery effect execution timing according to the extracted value of the execution timing determination random number (step S640). Then, a re-lottery execution flag corresponding to the determined execution timing is set (step S642). Specifically, when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, the re-lottery execution flag during the big hit is set, and when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending, A lottery execution flag is set.

  If it is determined in step S640 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the ending, the symbol information designating command is not actually executed in the ending, but the symbol information designating command is the microcomputer 100 for effect control. Since it was not received at ending, it was necessary to execute a re-lottery effect at the ending. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute an ending effect for when the symbol information designation command is not received (an ending effect of 3 seconds for executing the re-lottery effect). In this embodiment, the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect is 10 seconds, and the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is 3 seconds. If it is decided to do so, an ending effect with an execution time of 10 seconds will be executed. However, if an ending effect with an execution time of 10 seconds is executed when no symbol information designation command has been received, the game control micro This is because the control timing on the computer 560 side does not match. Also, in order to synchronize the execution time of the ending effect between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100, the ending is not determined as the execution time of the re-drawing effect in step S640 (always the re-drawing) It is also possible to determine that a big hit is made as the execution timing of the production).

  On the other hand, when it is necessary to execute a re-lottery effect, that is, when a fanfare command specifying execution of the re-lottery effect is received during a big hit or ending (Y in step S638), it is specified by the fanfare command. The timing is determined as the execution timing of the re-lottery effect (step S641). Then, a re-lottery execution flag corresponding to the determined execution timing is set (step S642).

  When a variation pattern command for both a probable big hit / small hit is received suddenly, but no symbol information designation command is received, a small hit symbol is determined as a temporary stop symbol in the temporary determination symbol determination process (FIG. 81). See), and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed. Therefore, it is preferable to derive and display a sudden probability variation symbol in a redrawing effect so as not to give a disadvantage to the player when it is a sudden probability variation big hit instead of a small hit. However, since the small hit symbol is very similar to the sudden probability change symbol, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the small symbol is generated by the stop symbol or whether the sudden probability variable big symbol is generated. For this reason, even if the game state is shifted to the probable change state even though the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, it is considered that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in this embodiment, a re-lottery effect that suddenly promotes a small hit symbol to a probable variation symbol during execution of the two-round effect is not executed. However, such a re-lottery effect may be executed.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (ending command: A301 (H) to A305 (H)) for designating the end of the jackpot (ending) (Y in step S643), the effect control microcomputer 100 has The ending reception flag corresponding to the content of the ending command is set (step S644). For example, depending on the content of the ending command (such as jackpot type), an ending reception flag indicating the end of a normal jackpot, an ending reception flag indicating the end of a promiscuous jackpot (no redrawing effect), a promising big hit (redrawing effect during a jackpot) An ending reception flag indicating the end of execution), an ending reception flag indicating the end of probability variation jackpot (execution of re-lottery effect by ending), and an ending reception flag indicating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  If the received command read in step S612 is another effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag corresponding to the received command (step S645).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first decorative symbol determination process (step S621). In the first decorative symbol determination process, when the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern command dedicated to a disconnection (Y in step S651), a disconnection determination flag indicating that the disconnection has been determined is set (step S652). ), Whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern with reach is checked (step S653). If it is not a variation pattern with reach (N in step S653), the production control microcomputer 100 executes reach no-miss determination processing (step S654). The detailed contents of the reach-less losing determination process will be described later (see FIG. 45).

  If it is a variation pattern with reach (Y of step S653), the production control microcomputer 100 executes reach determination loss determination processing (step S655). The detailed contents of the reach loss determination process will be described later (see FIG. 53).

  If the variation pattern command is not for the outlier-specific variation pattern command (N in step S651) but for the probability variation big hit (Y in step S656), the production control microcomputer 100 indicates that the probability variation big hit has been determined. A probability variation big hit determination flag is set (step S657). Then, a first probability variation design determination process is executed (step S658). The detailed contents of the first probability variation design determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 58 and 59).

  If it is not a variation pattern command dedicated to a promiscuous jackpot (N in step S656) but a variation pattern command dedicated to a normal jackpot (Y in step S659), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the normal jackpot has been determined. The normal big hit determination flag shown is set (step S660). Then, a first uncertain variable symbol determination process is executed (step S661). The detailed contents of the first uncertain variable design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 60).

  When it is not the variation pattern command dedicated to the normal big hit (N in Step S659) but the variation pattern command dedicated to the sudden probability variation big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 indicates that the sudden probability variation big hit indicating that the sudden probability variation big hit has been determined. A determination flag is set (step S662). Then, a sudden probability variation design determination process is executed (step S663). The detailed contents of the sudden probability variation design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 61).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing reachless losing determination processing (step S654). The reach-less-losing determination process is executed when a variation pattern command that specifies a variation pattern of variation numbers 1 to 4 is received.

  In the reach-less losing determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). Is determined (step S1000A). When the chance eye A is stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then the effect is developed as if it develops into super reach (development into super reach). A dummy effect which is likely to develop but does not develop (see FIG. 85) is executed, and the chance eye A is determined as it is as a stop symbol.

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by the chance A stop (N in Step S1000A), that is, if the variation patterns are variation numbers 1 and 2, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts the left symbol determination random number ( Step S1001). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the left symbol of the off symbol using the left symbol selection table (T-1) shown in FIG. 46 according to the extracted random number value (step S1002). In the left symbol selection table, as shown in FIG. 46, a plurality of determination values are assigned to each left symbol substantially equally. The left symbol selection table (T-1) shown in FIG. 46 is a table for determining the middle symbol in the left display area of the variable display device 9. The number associated with each left symbol indicates the number of assigned judgment values. The total number of assigned determination values is the same as the number (range) of updated random values. “Max67” indicates that the number of random values is 67 (0 to 66). Therefore, in the left symbol selection table, for example, the ratio at which the left symbol “8” is determined is 4/67. This also applies to other tables (for example, “max99” indicates that the number of random values is 99 (0 to 98)).

  The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value as the left symbol. The determined left symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  In this embodiment, the random number for determining the left symbol (left symbol determining random number) extracted in step S1001 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as a first symbol random number (first identification information random number).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts the right symbol determining random number (step S1003). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the right symbol addition value determination table (T-2) corresponding to the left symbol shown in FIG. 47 (step S1004). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the right symbol of the off symbol using the right symbol addition value determination table (T-2) corresponding to the left symbol according to the random value extracted in step S1003 (step S1003). S1005).

  As shown in FIG. 47, the right symbol addition value determination table is a table when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) determined in step S1002 is a numeric symbol (“1” “5”). And the table when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is a numeric symbol (“2” “6”), and the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display region) is a numeric symbol ( "3" and "7"), the table when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is a numeric symbol ("4" and "8"), and the left symbol (left The table when the symbol in the middle of the display area is a blank symbol (“*” between “1” and “2”), and the symbol when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is blank ( The table when “*” between “2” and “3” and the left design (left display area The table when the column symbol is a blank symbol (“*” between “3” and “4”), and the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is a blank symbol (“4”). And “*” between “5” and “5” and the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is a blank symbol (“*” between “5” and “6”) A table at a certain time, a table when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is a blank symbol ("*" between "6" and "7"), and the left symbol (left display) The table when the symbol in the middle of the area is a blank symbol (“*” between “7” and “8”) and the symbol when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is blank (“ A table for “*” between 8 ”and“ 1 ”is prepared. In FIG. 47, only the table when the left symbol is a blank symbol “*” between “1” and “2” is shown as the table when the left symbol is a blank symbol. The right symbol addition value determination table (T-2) shown in FIG. 47 is obtained by adding the middle symbol of the right display area in the variable display device 9 (addition of the middle symbol of the right display area to the middle symbol of the left display area). This is a table for determining (value).

  In the right symbol addition value determination table, in the table when the left symbol is a numerical symbol (“1” “5”), for example, in order to prevent single reach from occurring, the addition value “ The number of determination values assigned to “2” is “0”. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, when the determined left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display area) is “5” (symbol number 7), the symbol number of the right symbol of “5” is Therefore, when the addition value “2” for the left symbol is determined, reach will occur, and in order to avoid this, a decision value should not be assigned to the addition value “2” for the left symbol. ing. Table when the left symbol is a number symbol (“2” “6”), table when the left symbol is a symbol symbol (“3” “7”), and the left symbol is a symbol symbol (“4”) The same applies to the table when “8”).

  Also, in the table when the left symbol is a blank symbol (the table when the left symbol shown in FIG. 47 is “*” between “1” and “2”), single reach and double reach do not occur. Therefore, the number of determination values assigned to the added values “2”, “4”, and “6” for the determined left symbol is “0”. For example, as shown in FIG. 47, when the left symbol is “*” (“*” between “1” and “2”), the upper symbol of the left display area is “1” and the lower symbol. Is “2”. In this case, in order to prevent the occurrence of double reach, the determination value assigned to the added value “4” for the left symbol in which the upper symbol of the right display area is “2” and the lower symbol is “1” The number is “0”. In addition, in order to prevent single reach from occurring, an added value “2” is added to the left symbol, which is the upper symbol “1” in the right display region, and a left symbol, where the lower symbol in the right display region is “2”. The number of determination values assigned to the added value “6” for the symbol is “0”.

  The production control microcomputer 100 extracts a random value in step S1003, selects a right symbol addition value determination table corresponding to the left symbol determined in step S1002, and adds corresponding to the determination value that matches the extracted random value. The value is determined, and the symbol obtained by adding the added value to the left symbol is determined as the right symbol (the middle symbol in the right display area).

  In this embodiment, the random number (the right symbol determining random number) for determining the added value for the left symbol extracted in step S1003 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as a second symbol random number (second identification information random number). As shown in FIG. 47, the second symbol random number is “max99”, that is, the number of random number values is 0 to 98, and is different from the first symbol random number of “max67”.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1006). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the medium symbol addition value determination table (T-3) shown in FIG. 51 by using the chance prohibition rule table (T-4) shown in FIG. 50 (step S1007). . Then, in accordance with the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol of the off symbol using the middle symbol addition value determination table (T-3) selected in step S1007 (step S1008). 51. The middle symbol addition value determination table (T-3) shown in FIG. 51 is the middle symbol of the middle display area in the variable display device 9 (the middle symbol of the middle display area relative to the middle symbol of the right display area). Is an addition value).

  Here, as described above, if the chance item A or B is not displayed and the chance item A or B is displayed in a stopped state, the chance item A or B is displayed in a stopped state. Regardless, the production that develops into the super reach and the dummy production that seems to develop into the super reach are not executed, and there is a possibility that the expectation for the chance will be lowered and the interest of the game will be lowered. In addition, even if it is not decided to suddenly hit the odds, the chance of sudden use (suddenly the probability variation pattern) will stop and the player will suddenly win the odds, even though it will not suddenly win. There is a risk of misunderstanding. In addition, even if it is not decided to make a small hit, if the chance item (small hit symbol) for small hits is stopped and displayed, the player has hit a small hit (or not a small hit) (or Suddenly, there is a risk of misunderstanding that it may have been a big hit. In addition, symbols similar to chances (chances for sudden chances (suddenly probable symbols), chances for small hits (spots)) are derived and displayed as outliers. If this happens, there is a risk of sudden misunderstanding that it has been a big hit or a small hit.

  Therefore, in order to avoid such a decrease in interest and misunderstanding, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern specified by the received fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation without stopping the chance eye A. If it is (N in Step S1000A), control for prohibiting the same symbol as the chance symbol (Chance Eye A, Chance Eye B, Random Opportunity Eye, Small Hit Opportunity Eye) from being derived and displayed as a symbol In addition, the symbols (exactly similar symbols, small hits similar symbols) that are similar to the chances (chances for sudden chances (suddenly probable symbols), chances for small hits (small hits symbol)) are removed. Control that prohibits derivation and display as is also executed. In this embodiment, when the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern of normal variation that accompanies the chance eye A stop (Y in step S1000A), the chance eye A is used as a pattern that is out of place. Executes the control to derive and display.

  FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 show arrangement patterns (chance eye prohibition patterns) of the left symbol and the right symbol in which chance eyes (including sudden similarity symbols and small hit similarity symbols) may occur. When the determined left symbol and right symbol correspond to the chance eye prohibition patterns shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, chance chances (including a sudden similarity symbol and a small hit similarity symbol) may occur. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the chance eye prohibition table to check whether the determined combination of the left symbol and the right symbol corresponds to the chance eye prohibition pattern. As shown in FIG. 50, in the chance eye prohibition table, the numbers of the chance eye prohibition patterns (“LR1” to “LR80”) are assigned to the matrix of the left symbol and the right symbol. For example, when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display region) is “8” and the right symbol (the middle symbol in the right display region) is “2”, the chance eye prohibition pattern “LR40” (FIG. 6). Corresponds to the forbidden pattern of the chance eye 40C shown in FIG. “LR0” indicates that it does not fall under the chance eye prohibition pattern. For example, when the left symbol is “8” and the right symbol is “1”, it does not correspond to the chance prohibition pattern shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, and therefore “LR0” is assigned.

  In this way, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms which of the chance eye prohibition patterns (LR1 to LR80) corresponds to using the chance eye prohibition table, or does not correspond to the chance eye prohibition pattern. (LR0) is confirmed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the medium symbol addition value determination table (FIG. 51) corresponding to LR0 to LR80. For example, when the combination of the left symbol and the right symbol corresponds to the chance prohibition pattern “LR1”, it is determined to use the middle symbol addition value determination table associated with “LR1” illustrated in FIG. Although not shown in FIG. 51, tables associated with “LR2” to “LR80” are also provided as the medium symbol addition value determination table.

  In the intermediate symbol addition value determination table associated with “LR1” to “LR80”, the determination value is not assigned to the addition value of the middle symbol for the right symbol that establishes the chance eye (that is, the determination value to be allocated). The number is 0). For example, in the middle symbol addition value determination table associated with “LR1”, the right symbol (the middle symbol in the right display area) at the chance eye 1C shown in FIG. Since the middle symbol of the display area is “*” (note that the upper symbol “1” of the middle display area), the middle symbol addition value “15” for the right symbol that establishes the chance 1C is determined. A value has not been allocated. Further, since the right symbol (the middle symbol in the right display area) is “1” and the middle symbol (the middle symbol in the middle display area) is “1” in the chance eye 41C shown in FIG. The determination value is not assigned to the addition value “0” of the middle symbol for the right symbol that establishes the eye 41C.

  On the other hand, in the middle symbol addition value determination table associated with “LR0”, no chance is established no matter what symbol the middle symbol becomes. It is.

  The production control microcomputer 100 selects the middle symbol addition value determination table in step S1007, determines an addition value corresponding to the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1006, and adds the addition value to the right symbol. The symbol is determined as a middle symbol (middle symbol in the middle display area) (step S1008). Thus, in the reach-less losing determination process, it is prohibited to determine the out-of-order symbol (including the sudden similarity symbol and the small hit similarity symbol) as the decorative symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the random number (medium symbol determination random number) for determining the addition value for the right symbol extracted in step S1006 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as a third symbol random number (third identification information random number). As shown in FIG. 51, the third symbol random number is “max97”, that is, the number of random numbers is 0 to 96, and the first symbol random number “max67” and the second symbol random number “max99” (second It is a random number different from (identification information random number).

  In this way, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are determined using different random numbers (the first symbol random number, the second symbol random number, and the third symbol random number). There are a variety of combinations of the middle right off-line symbols. That is, when the 1st design random number, the 2nd design random number, and the 3rd design random number are updated in the same range, if the update timing and extraction timing of these random numbers are synchronized, Although there is a risk of being biased, as described above, the first symbol random number, the second symbol random number, and the third symbol random number are configured to be updated in different ranges. Will not be biased.

  In step S1000A, when the variation pattern is accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A (Y in step S1000A), that is, when the variation pattern has the variation numbers 3 and 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye. A random number is extracted (step S1000B). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (C-1) shown in FIG. 52 according to the extracted random number value (step S1000C). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the output of the determination value that matches the random value as the chance item A. The chance eye A thus determined is derived and displayed at the end of the fluctuation. The determined chance item A is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the chance eye A selection table includes each chance eye A (1C-4C, 9C-12C, 17C-20C, 25C-28C, 33C-36C, 41C-44C, 49C-52C, 57C- 60C, 65C to 68C), a plurality of determination values are allocated substantially evenly. As shown in FIG. 52, the total number of determination values assigned to each chance item A is 83 (that is, “max83”).

  As described above, in the non-reach losing determination process, when the variation pattern is not accompanied by the chance eye A stop, among the random numbers for determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the left symbol determining random number and the right symbol determining random number Random numbers and random numbers for determining a middle symbol are extracted (steps S1001, S1003, S1006), a left symbol selection table (T-1), a right symbol selection table (T-2), and a middle symbol addition value determination table (T- 3) is used to determine the left middle right outlier symbol which is a disjoint eye (steps S1002, S1005, S1008), and if the variation pattern is accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A, the left symbol determining random number The random number for determining the right symbol and the random number for determining the middle symbol are not extracted (without using these random numbers), and the random number for determining the chance eye is extracted (step S1000B). , Using the opportunity eyes A selection table (C-1), to determine the chances eyes A is loosened th (step S1000C). Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the chance eye A is finally stopped by the change pattern command (stop display at the end of change), and to determine the stop design of the decorative design according to the specified content, increasing the number of commands It is possible to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in accordance with the effect mode (whether the chance eye A is stopped and displayed). As a result, various effects using the chance eye A can be performed without increasing the control burden of the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing reach determination loss determination processing (step S655). The reach loss determination process is executed when a variation pattern command specifying a variation pattern of variation numbers 5 to 41 is received.

  In the reach determination loss determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a reach symbol determination random number (step S1011). Next, based on the contents of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), the production control microcomputer 100 describes the variation pattern with a single / double reach (“S & W” in FIG. 17). Is determined (step S1012). As shown in FIG. 17, only the normal reach is a single / double common reach, and the super reach A to D is either a single reach or a double reach (only the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach of the fluctuation number 5). Is a single reach instead of a single / double reach). If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1012), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common reach symbol selection table shown in FIG. 54 according to the random number extracted in step S1011. Reach symbols (same left and right symbols) are determined and stored using (H-1) (step S1013).

  In the common reach symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the reach symbols (reach patterns; 1UH to 8UH, 1LH to 8LH, 1CH to 8CH, 1WH to 8WH) shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1011 as the reach design.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 identifies the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), and determines the middle symbol from the identified symbol difference. Determine and store (step S1014). Here, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol of the middle symbol indicates the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol with respect to the middle symbol on the reach line. For example, in the case of UH type reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the upper middle symbol is shown. In addition, in the case of double reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the symbol afterward (for example, “1” in the case of 1WH) is shown. Specifically, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 8 (the variation pattern of “normal reach +2”), the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol is “+2”, so the reach symbol determined in step S1013 is For example, if “7 UH” (when a reach of “7” is established in the upper stage), “8” is determined as the middle symbol in the upper stage. Further, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 8 (the variation pattern of “normal reach +2”), if the reach pattern determined in step S1013 is, for example, “1WH” (double reach of “1” and “8”), the middle stage “2” is determined as the middle symbol.

  When double reach is established (when the reach symbol determined in step S1013 is a double reach symbol), the symbol difference designated by the variation pattern (the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the later symbol) is determined. If it is “−2”, the middle symbol on the reach line becomes the same symbol as the first hit symbol and becomes a big hit symbol. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when double reach can be established (in the case of a variation pattern designating a single / double common reach), the symbol difference designated by the variation pattern is “−2”. It is not to become.

  In step S1012, if the variation pattern is not a single / double common reach (N in step S1012), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (a variation pattern having “S” in FIG. 17) (step S1015). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1015), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1011 and displays the single reach design selection table (H-2) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store the reach symbol (step S1016).

  In the single reach symbol selection table, among the reach symbols shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of determination values are assigned to single reach reach symbols (1UH to 8UH, 1LH to 8LH, 1CH to 8CH). The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1011 as the reach design.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 identifies the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol of the middle symbol based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), and develops the super reach from the identified symbol difference. The middle symbol to be temporarily stopped at the time (at the end of normal reach) is determined and stored (step S1018). Here, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol of the middle symbol indicates the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol with respect to the middle symbol on the reach line. For example, in the case of UH type reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the upper middle symbol is shown. Specifically, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9 (the variation pattern of “Super A-2”), the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol is “−2”, so it was determined in step S1016. If the reach symbol is, for example, “7CH” (when a reach of “7” is established in the middle row), “6” is determined as the middle symbol in the middle row. If the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern that involves stopping the chance item A or B, the middle symbol determined in step S1018 is not a middle symbol that is temporarily stopped at the time of super-reach development, but is halted at the end of variation. It becomes a middle symbol to do.

  In step S1016, when the variation pattern is not accompanied by a single reach (N in step S1015), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is accompanied by a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a reach symbol using the double reach symbol selection table (H-3) shown in FIG. 56 according to the random number value extracted in step S1011 (step S1017).

  In the double reach symbol selection table, among the reach symbols shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of determination values are assigned to double reach reach symbols (IWH to 8WH). The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1011 as the reach design.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 identifies the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol of the middle symbol based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), and develops the super reach from the identified symbol difference. The middle symbol to be temporarily stopped at the time (at the end of normal reach) is determined and stored (step S1018). Here, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol of the middle symbol indicates the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol with respect to the middle symbol on the reach line. For example, in the case of double reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the symbol after the last (for example, “1” in the case of 1WH) is shown. Specifically, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 11 (the variation pattern of “Super A-1”), the reach symbol determined in step S1017 is, for example, “1WH” (double reach of “1” and “8”). ), “*” Between “8” and “1” is determined as the middle symbol in the middle.

  In the case of a variation pattern that specifies double reach, if the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern (the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the later symbol) is “−2”, the middle symbol on the reach line is the first. It becomes the same symbol as the winning symbol and becomes a big hit symbol. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, in the case of a variation pattern designating double reach, the symbol difference designated by the variation pattern is not set to “−2”.

  Note that the middle symbol determined in step S1018 is a middle symbol that is temporarily stopped during super-reach development, but in this embodiment, the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed when super-reach ends is also determined in step S1018. And the same design.

  In this embodiment, the random number (reach symbol determination random number) for determining the reach symbol (left and right symbols) extracted in step S1011 of the reach-losing determination process is referred to as a reach symbol random number (reach identification information random number). As shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, the reach design random number is “max 127”, that is, a random number having a random number value of 0 to 126.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the pattern is a variation pattern accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1019). ). In the case where the chance eye A is stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then the effect of developing into the super reach B is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a stop of the chance eye A (Y in step S1019), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1020). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (C-1) shown in FIG. 52 in accordance with the extracted random number value (step S1021). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the output of the determination value that matches the random value as the chance item A. The chance eye A thus determined is stopped and displayed at the end of the normal fluctuation. The determined chance item A is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A (N in step S1019), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the chance based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a stop of eye B (step S1022). When the chance item B is stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance item B is stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed. In this embodiment, when the chance item B is stopped and displayed, it always develops into a double reach super reach D.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a stop of the chance eye B (Y in step S1022), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1023). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table (C-2) shown in FIG. 57 according to the extracted random number value (step S1024). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the output of the determination value that matches the random value as the chance item B. The chance item B determined in this way is stopped and displayed at the end of the normal fluctuation. The determined chance item B is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the chance eye B selection table includes each chance eye B (5C-8C, 13C-16C, 21C-24C, 29C-32C, 37C-40C, 45C-48C, 53C-56C, 61C- 64C, 69C to 72C), a plurality of determination values are allocated substantially evenly. As shown in FIG. 57, the total number of determination values assigned to each chance item B is 83 (that is, “max83”).

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by the stop of chance chance B (N in step S1022), the production control microcomputer 100 relieves based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is to execute a loss effect (step S1025). If the variation pattern is to execute the relief losing effect (Y in step S1025), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the symbol one frame before the reach symbol or the symbol two frames before the relief losing effect before executing the relief losing effect. It is determined and stored as a middle symbol to be temporarily stopped (at the end of super reach) (step S1026). Specifically, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern with single reach, the symbol two frames before the reach symbol (for example, “2” if the reach symbol is “3”) is temporarily stored before the relief loss effect is performed. If it is determined that the middle symbol is to be stopped and the variation pattern is a variation pattern with double reach, the middle symbol if the design is one frame before the reach symbol (the back symbol on the reach line) (for example, the reach symbol is “2WH”) The middle symbol of “*” between “1” and “2” is determined as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped before the relief loss effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, the middle symbol that stops after execution of the relief loss effect is the same as the middle symbol that is temporarily stopped before the relief loss effect. In other words, if the middle symbol temporarily stopped before the relief loss effect is performed is a symbol one frame before the reach symbol, the middle symbol stopped after the relief lose effect is also set as the symbol one frame before the reach symbol. If the symbol is two frames before the symbol, the middle symbol that stops after execution of the relief loss effect is also the symbol two frames before the reach symbol.

  In addition, when double reach is established, if the symbol that is temporarily stopped before the execution of the relief losing effect is the symbol two frames before the reach symbol (the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol), as described above. In addition, since the middle symbol on the reach line becomes the same symbol as the previous winning symbol, in order to avoid this, when the double reach is established, the middle symbol is the symbol one frame before.

  58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the first probability variation design determination process. The first probability variation design determination process is a process executed when a variation pattern command indicating variation patterns 42 to 86 (variation patterns dedicated to probability variation big hits) shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 is received. . The first probability variation design determination processing (processing to determine the decorative symbol to be derived and displayed as any probability variation symbol) is the probability variation big hit (no re-lottery effect) in step S62, that is, “probability variation 1” shown in FIG. It is executed when is determined. It should be noted that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed at the end of the variation without executing the re-lottery effect during the variation of the ornament symbol, which is referred to as “probability direct hit”.

  In the first probability variation design determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1031). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a variation pattern (“S & W” in FIG. 18) with a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). Is determined (step S1032). If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1032), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the random value extracted in step S1031 to display the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. The probability variation symbol is determined and stored using (F-2) (step S1033). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1039.

  In the common big hit symbol selection table, among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. , 8CF, 1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF, 1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF). The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1031 as the probability variation symbol.

  In the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 68, the number of determination values assigned to each probability variation symbol is not uniform. Specifically, a relatively large number of judgment values are assigned to the probability variation symbols of the right-down line (SF) and the right-up line (AF), and the upper, middle, and lower horizontal lines (UF, LF, CF) Relatively few judgment values are assigned to the probabilistic symbols. Therefore, the rate of the probability variation pattern of the lower right line (SF) and the upper right line (AF) is determined higher than the probability variation pattern of the upper, middle and lower horizontal lines (UF, LF, CF). . In addition, in other jackpot symbol selection tables (F-1, F-3, F-7 to F-9, F-11 to F-13, F-15 to F17) to be described later, the symbols are distributed to the symbols. The number of judgment values obtained is uneven. Therefore, the ratio that a specific jackpot symbol is determined is higher than other jackpot symbols.

  In step S1032, if the variation pattern is not a single / double reach (N in step S1032), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content of the variation pattern command received (variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (a variation pattern having “S” in FIG. 18) (step S1034). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1034), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1031, and the single jackpot symbol selection table (F-8) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a probability variation symbol (step S1035).

  The single jackpot symbol selection table includes a single reach probability variation symbol (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, 7CF, 8CF). Multiple judgment values are assigned to. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1031 as the probability variation symbol. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1039.

  In step S1034, when the variation pattern is not accompanied by a single reach (N in step S1034), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is accompanied by a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1036). If it is a double hit (Y in step S1036), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1031, and the double hit big hit symbol selection table (F-12) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a probable variation symbol (step S1037). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1039.

  In the double hit big hit symbol selection table, a plurality of judgment values are assigned to symbols (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF) that are double wins among the probability variation symbols. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1031 as the probability variation symbol.

  If it is a double hit (N in step S1036), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1031, and the double hit big hit symbol selection table (F-16) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a probable variation symbol (step S1038). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1039.

  In the double hit big hit symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to symbols (1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) which are double after hit among the probability variation symbols. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1031 as the probability variation symbol.

  In step S1039, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the pattern is a variation pattern with a chance eye A stop based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1039). S1039). In the case where the chance eye A is stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then the effect of developing into the super reach B is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a stop of the chance eye A (Y in step S1039), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1040). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (C-1) shown in FIG. 52 in accordance with the extracted random number value (step S1041). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the output of the determination value that matches the random value as the chance item A. The chance eye A thus determined is stopped and displayed at the end of the normal fluctuation.

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A (N in Step S1039), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the chance based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in Step S617). It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a stop of eye B (step S1042). When the chance item B is stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance item B is stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed. In this embodiment, when the chance item B is stopped and displayed, it always develops into a double reach super reach D.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a stop of the chance eye B (Y in step S1042), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1043). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table (C-2) shown in FIG. 57 according to the extracted random number value (step S1044). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the output of the determination value that matches the random value as the chance item B. The chance item B determined in this way is stopped and displayed at the end of the normal fluctuation. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1046.

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by the chance B stop (N in Step S1042), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the medium is based on the content of the variation pattern command received (the variation pattern saved in Step S617). A symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol of the symbol is specified, and a middle symbol to be temporarily stopped at the time of super reach development (at the end of normal reach) is determined and stored from the specified symbol difference (step S1045). Note that the processing in step S1045 does not have to be performed in the case of a big hit after fluctuation of the normal reach (when step S1033 is executed). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1046. Here, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol of the middle symbol indicates the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol with respect to the middle symbol on the reach line. For example, in the case of UH type reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the upper middle symbol is shown. In addition, when double reach is established, a symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the later symbol is shown. Specifically, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 44 (the variation pattern of “Super A-2”), the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol is “−2”, so that it was determined in step S1035. If the probability variation symbol is, for example, “7UF” (when a reach of “7” is established in the upper row), “6” is determined as the middle symbol in the upper row. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 48 (the fluctuation pattern of “Super A-1”), the probability variation symbol determined in step S1037 is, for example, “3SF” (“3” and “4” double reach is established. ), “*” Between “3” and “4” is determined as the middle symbol in the middle.

  If double reach is established (if the reach symbol determined in step S1033 is a double reach symbol, if the double reach symbol is determined in steps S1037 and S1038), the symbol specified by the variation pattern is used. If the difference (design difference with respect to the reach symbol for the later symbol) is “−2”, the middle symbol on the reach line becomes the same symbol as the first symbol and becomes a big hit symbol. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when double reach can be established, the symbol difference designated by the variation pattern is not set to “−2”.

  In step S1046, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the effect is a variation pattern for executing the per-relief effect based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1046). ). In the case of the variation pattern for executing the per-relief effect (Y in step S1046), the effect-control microcomputer 100 uses the symbol one frame before the reach symbol or the symbol two frames before the relief symbol before execution of the relief per-effect. It is determined and stored as a middle symbol to be temporarily stopped (at the end of super reach) (step S1047). Specifically, when single reach is established, a symbol that is two frames before the reach symbol (for example, “2” if the reach symbol is “3”) is temporarily stopped before execution of the per-relief effect. When the double reach is established, the symbols one frame before the reach symbol (rear hit symbol on the reach line) (for example, if the reach symbol is “3SF”, the middle symbols in the middle row are “3” and “4”. “*”) Between “)” is determined as a middle symbol to be temporarily stopped before the execution of the per-relief effect.

  In addition, when double reach is established, if the symbol that is temporarily stopped before execution of the per-relief effect is the symbol two frames before the reach symbol (the symbol difference “−2” relative to the reach symbol), as described above. In addition, since the middle symbol on the reach line becomes the same symbol as the previous winning symbol, in order to avoid this, when the double reach is established, the middle symbol is the symbol one frame before.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the first non-probable variable symbol determination process. Note that the first non-probable variable symbol determination process is a process executed when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern of variation numbers 115 to 121 shown in FIG. 19 is received. The first non-probable variable symbol determination process (a process for determining the ornamental symbol to be derived and displayed as one of the non-probable variable symbols) is a normal big hit or a probable big hit (with re-drawing effect) in step S62, that is, FIG. 23 (C). This is executed when the “normal”, “probability variation 2”, and “probability variation 3” shown are determined.

  In the first non-probable variable symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1071). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1072). As shown in FIG. 19, only normal reach is a single / double common reach, and super reach A and C are either single reach or double reach. If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1072), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the random value extracted in step S1071 to display the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. (F-1) is used to determine and store an uncertain variable symbol (step S1073). Thereafter, the process ends.

  The common jackpot symbol selection table includes non-probable symbols (2UF, 2LF, 2CF, 2SF, 2AF, 4UF, 4LF, 4CF, 4SF, 4AF, 6UF, 6LF, 6CF, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 6SF, 6AF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1071 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  In step S1072, if it is not a fluctuation pattern with a single / double reach (N in step S1072), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the contents of the received fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1074). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1074), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1071 to the single jackpot symbol selection table (F-7) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a non-probable variation symbol (step S1075). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1079.

  In the single jackpot symbol selection table, a plurality of judgment values are allocated to single reach non-probable variation symbols (2UF, 4UF, 6UF, 2LF, 4LF, 6LF, 2CF, 4CF, 6CF) among non-probability variation symbols. . The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1071 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  In step S1074, when the variation pattern is not accompanied by a single reach (N in step S1074), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is accompanied by a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1076). If it is a double tip (Y in step S1076), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1071 and displays a double tip jackpot symbol selection table (F-11) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a non-probable variable symbol (step S1077). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1079.

  In the double tip big hit symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to symbols (2SF, 4SF, 6SF) which are double tip among non-probability variable symbols. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1071 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  If it is a double hit (N in step S1076), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1071 and displays a double hit big hit symbol selection table (F-15) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a non-probable variation symbol (step S1078). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1079.

  In the double hit big hit symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to symbols (2AF, 4AF, 6AF) which are double after hits among non-probability variable symbols. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1071 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  In step S1079, the production control microcomputer 100 identifies the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol of the middle symbol based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), and superimposes the symbol difference from the identified symbol difference. A middle symbol to be temporarily stopped at the time of reach development (at the end of normal reach) is determined and stored (step S1079). Here, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol of the middle symbol indicates the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol with respect to the middle symbol on the reach line. For example, in the case of UH type reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the upper middle symbol is shown. In addition, when double reach is established, a symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the later symbol is shown. Specifically, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 116 (the variation pattern of “Super A −1”), the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol is “−1”, so that it was determined in step S1075. If the non-probable variation symbol is “2UF” (when the reach of “2” is established in the upper stage), “*” between “1” and “2” is determined as the upper middle symbol. Further, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 118 (the variation pattern of “Super C −1”), the non-probable variation determined in step S1077 is, for example, “2SF” (“2” and “3” double reach is established. If so, “*” between “2” and “3” is determined as the middle symbol in the middle.

  When double reach is established (when the double reach symbol is determined in steps S1077 and S1078), the symbol difference designated by the variation pattern (the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the later symbol) is “−. If it is “2”, the middle symbol on the reach line becomes the same symbol as the first hit symbol and becomes a big hit symbol. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when double reach can be established, the symbol difference designated by the variation pattern is not set to “−2”.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a sudden probability variation design determination process. The sudden probability variation design determination process is a process executed when a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the variation number 124 shown in FIG. 19 is received.

  In the sudden probability variation design determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1081). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 suddenly determines and stores the probability variation symbol using the random symbol selection table (F-25) shown in FIG. 62 according to the extracted random number value (step S1082).

  In the accuracy symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned substantially evenly to the sudden accuracy variation symbol (the chance item for accuracy) shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 100 suddenly determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the extracted random number value as the probability variation symbol.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the second decorative symbol determination process. In the second decorative symbol determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 first selects the normal jackpot designation command (8C01 (H)), the probability variation jackpot two designation command (8C03 (H)) or the received symbol information designation command. It is confirmed whether or not a 3 designation command (8C04 (H)) for probability variation is designated (step S671). When those contents are designated (Y in step S671), the production control microcomputer 100 indicates that the non-probable variation big hit has been determined (the big hit symbol at the time of stoppage of variation is the non-probable variable symbol). An uncertain variable big hit determination flag is set (step S672). Then, a second uncertain variable symbol determination process is executed (step S673). The detailed contents of the second non-probable variable symbol determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 64 and 65).

  When the symbol information designation command is not the normal jackpot designation command or the probability variation big hit 2, 3 designation command (N in step S671), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether the probability variation big hit 1 designation command (8C02 (H)). Is confirmed (step S674). If it is a command specifying one of the probable variation jackpots (Y in step S674), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the probable variation jackpot has been determined (the jackpot symbol at the time when the fluctuation is stopped is the probability variation symbol). Is set (step S675). Then, the second probability variation design determination process is executed (step S676). The detailed contents of the second probability variation symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 66).

  If the symbol information designation command is not a probability variation jackpot 1 designation command (N in step S674), the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not it is a sudden probability variation jackpot designation command (8C05 (H)) (step S677). . If it is a sudden probability change big hit designation command (Y in step S677), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a sudden probability change big hit determination flag indicating that the sudden probability change big hit has been determined (step S678). Then, a sudden probability variation design determination process is executed (step S679). Note that the sudden probability variation design determination process in step S675 is the same process (subroutine) as the process described in step S663 in FIG. 44 and FIG.

  When the symbol information designation command is not suddenly a probable big hit designation command (N in step S677), the symbol information designation command is a small hit designation command. If it is a small hit designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a small hit determination flag indicating that the small hit is determined (step S680A). Then, a small hit symbol determination process is executed (step S680B). The detailed contents of the small hit symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 79).

  FIGS. 64 and 65 are flowcharts showing the second non-probable variable symbol determination process. The second non-probable variable symbol determination process receives a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern (variation pattern for executing a re-lottery effect) with variation numbers 87 to 114 shown in FIG. This process is executed when a big hit designation command (8C01 (H)) or a probable big hit 2,3 designation command (8C03 (H), 8C04 (H)) is received. The second non-probable variable symbol determination process (a process for determining the ornamental symbol to be derived and displayed as one of the non-probable variable symbols) is a normal big hit or a probable big hit (with re-drawing effect) in step S62, that is, FIG. 23 (C). This is executed when the “normal”, “probability variation 2”, and “probability variation 3” shown are determined.

  In the second non-probable variable symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1101). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1102). If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1102), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 67 according to the random value extracted in step S1101. (F-1) is used to determine and store an uncertain variable symbol (step S1103). Then, the process proceeds to step S1109. The re-lottery effect is executed during the fluctuation. In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is also derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed. The final stop symbol is also the same non-probable variable determined in step S1103.

  In step S1102, if it is not a fluctuation pattern with a single / double common reach (N in step S1102), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the contents of the received fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1104). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1104), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1101 to the single jackpot symbol selection table (F-7) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a non-probable variation (step S1105). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1109. The re-lottery effect is executed during the fluctuation. In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is also derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed. The final stop symbol is also the same non-probable variable determined in step S1105.

  In step S1104, when the variation pattern is not accompanied by a single reach (N in step S1104), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is accompanied by a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1106). If it is a double tip (Y in step S1106), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1101, and the double tip jackpot symbol selection table (F-11) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a non-probable variable symbol (step S1107). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1109. The re-lottery effect is executed during the fluctuation. In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is also derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed. The final stop symbol is also the same non-probable variable determined in step S1107.

  When it is a double hit (N in Step S1106), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the double hit big hit symbol selection table (F-15) shown in FIG. 76 according to the random number extracted in Step S1101. Is used to determine and store a non-probable variable symbol (step S1108). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1109. The re-lottery effect is executed during the fluctuation. In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is also derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed. The final stop symbol is also the same non-probable variable determined in step S1108.

  In step S1109, the effect control microcomputer 100 designates that the symbol information designation command executes the re-lottery effect after the big hit and promotes the non-probable variation symbol to the probability variation symbol, that is, the probability variation big hit two designation command (8C03). (H)) or whether the command is a probability variation big three designation command (8C04 (H)) (step S1109). If it is a symbol information designation command that designates promotion after a big hit (Y in step S1109), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that a re-lottery effect is executed after the big win ( Step S1110). If it is a command with 2 probable big hits, a re-lottery effect execution flag is set to indicate that a re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big win. Set an ending re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that this is to be done. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a probable variation symbol using the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 68 according to the random value extracted in step S1101 (step S1111). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect executed after the big hit game is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1112.

  In step S1112, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the pattern is a variation pattern accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1112). S1112). In the case where the chance eye A is stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then the effect of developing into the super reach B is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a stop of the chance eye A (Y in step S1112), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1113). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (C-1) shown in FIG. 52 in accordance with the extracted random number value (step S1114). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the output of the determination value that matches the random value as the chance item A. The chance eye A thus determined is stopped and displayed at the end of the normal fluctuation.

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A (N in step S1112), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the chance based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a stop of eye B (step S1115). When the chance item B is stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance item B is stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed. In this embodiment, when the chance item B is stopped and displayed, it always develops into a double reach super reach D.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a stop of the chance eye B (Y in step S1115), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1116). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table (C-2) shown in FIG. 57 according to the extracted random number value (step S1117). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the output of the determination value that matches the random value as the chance item B. The chance item B determined in this way is stopped and displayed at the end of the normal fluctuation. Then, the process ends.

  When the variation pattern is not accompanied by the stop of the chance eye B (N in step S1115), the production control microcomputer 100 determines the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), The symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol is specified, and the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped at the time of super reach development (at the end of normal reach) is determined and stored from the specified symbol difference (step S1118). Note that the processing in step S1118 does not have to be performed when the big hit is made after the change in the normal reach (when step S1103 is executed). Then, the process ends. Here, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol of the middle symbol indicates the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol with respect to the middle symbol on the reach line. For example, in the case of UH type reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the upper middle symbol is shown. In addition, when double reach is established, a symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the later symbol is shown. Specifically, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 88 (the variation pattern of “Super A −1”), the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol is “−1”. If the non-probable variation symbol is “2UF” (when the reach of “2” is established in the upper stage), “*” between “1” and “2” is determined as the upper middle symbol. Further, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 90 (the variation pattern of “Super A-1”), the non-probable variation determined in step S1107 is, for example, “2SF” (“2” and “3” double reach is established. If so, “*” between “2” and “3” is determined as the middle symbol in the middle.

  If double reach is established (if the reach symbol determined in step S1103 is a double reach symbol, if the double reach symbol is determined in steps S1107 and S1108), the symbol specified by the variation pattern is used. If the difference (design difference with respect to the reach symbol for the later symbol) is “−2”, the middle symbol on the reach line becomes the same symbol as the first symbol and becomes a big hit symbol. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when double reach can be established, the symbol difference designated by the variation pattern is not set to “−2”.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the second probability variation design determination process. Note that the second probability variation design determination process receives a variation pattern command indicating variation patterns 87 to 114 shown in FIG. 19 (variation pattern for executing the re-lottery effect), and also performs probability variation big hits as symbol information designation commands. This process is executed when a 1 designation command (8C02 (H)) is received. The second probability variation design determination processing (processing to determine the decorative symbol derived and displayed as any probability variation symbol) is a probability variation big hit (no re-drawing effect) in step S62, that is, “probability variation 1” shown in FIG. It is executed when is determined.

  In the second probability variation symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1130). Then, a temporary stop symbol determining random number is extracted (step S1131). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1132). If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1132), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the common jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 69 according to the random numbers extracted in steps S1130 and S1131. The temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined and stored using the selection table (F-3) (step S1133). Thereafter, the process ends.

  Here, the “temporary stop symbol” refers to a non-probable variable symbol that is temporarily stopped before the fluctuating re-lottery effect is executed. In addition, the “final stop symbol” refers to a probability variation symbol that is derived and displayed after the re-drawing effect being changed is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the common jackpot symbol selection table includes a table for determining a final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining a temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol table). Is provided. In the final stop symbol table, the probable symbols (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, 7CF, 8CF, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF, 1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The temporary stop symbol table includes a table when the final stop symbol is “1UF” to “8UF”, a table when “1LF” to “8LF”, a table when “1CF” to “8CF”, The table is divided into a table for “1SF” to “8SF” and a table for “1AF” to “8AF”. In each table included in the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the non-probable variable symbols.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1130 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol as the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1131. decide.

  In step S1132, if it is not a variation pattern with a single / double common reach (N in step S1132), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content of the variation pattern command received (variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1134). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1134), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the single jackpot symbol selection table (shown in FIG. 72) according to the random number values extracted in steps S1130 and S1131. The temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined and stored using F-9) (step S1135). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1139.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the single jackpot symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol table). Is provided. In the final stop symbol table, a probability variation symbol (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, which is a single reach among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 7CF, 8CF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The temporary stop symbol table is divided into a table when the final stop symbol is “1UF” to “8UF”, a table when “1LF” to “8LF”, and a table when “1CF” to “8CF”. It has been. In each table included in the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the non-probable variable symbols.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1130 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol as the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1131. decide.

  In step S1134, when the variation pattern is not a single reach (N in step S1134), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1136). When it is a double front end (Y in step S1136), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the double front end jackpot symbol selection table (F -13) is used to determine and store the temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol (step S1137). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1139.

  75. As shown in FIG. 75, the double-first hit big hit symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol table). And are provided. In the final stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation symbols (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF) that are the double hits among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. As the temporary stop symbol table, only the table when the final stop symbol is “1SF” to “8SF” is set. In the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to non-probable variation symbols.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1130 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol as the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1131. decide.

  When it is a double after hit (N in step S1136), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the double after hit big hit symbol selection table (F) shown in FIG. -17) is used to determine and store the temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol (step S1138). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1139.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the double rear hit big hit symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol table). And are provided. In the final stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation symbols (1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) which are double hits among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. As the temporary stop symbol table, only the table when the final stop symbol is “1AF” to “8AF” is set. In the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to non-probable variation symbols.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1130 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol as the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1131. decide.

  In step S1139, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the pattern is a variation pattern accompanied by a stop of the chance eye A based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1139). S1139). In the case where the chance eye A is stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then the effect of developing into the super reach B is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a stop of the chance eye A (Y in step S1139), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1140). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (C-1) shown in FIG. 52 in accordance with the extracted random number value (step S1141). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the output of the determination value that matches the random value as the chance item A. The chance eye A thus determined is stopped and displayed at the end of the normal fluctuation.

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A (N in step S1139), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the chance based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by the stop of eye B (step S1142). When the chance item B is stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance item B is stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed. In this embodiment, when the chance item B is stopped and displayed, it always develops into a double reach super reach D.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a stop of the chance eye B (Y in step S1142), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1143). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table (C-2) shown in FIG. 57 according to the extracted random number value (step S1144). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the output of the determination value that matches the random value as the chance item B. The chance item B determined in this way is stopped and displayed at the end of the normal fluctuation. Thereafter, the process ends.

  When the variation pattern is not accompanied by the stop of the chance eye B (N in step S1142), the production control microcomputer 100, based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), The symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol is specified, and the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped at the time of super reach development (at the end of normal reach) is determined and stored from the specified symbol difference (step S1145). Thereafter, the process ends. Here, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol of the middle symbol indicates the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol with respect to the middle symbol on the reach line. For example, in the case of UH type reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the upper middle symbol is shown. In addition, when double reach is established, a symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the later symbol is shown. Specifically, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 88 (the variation pattern of “Super A −1”), the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol is “−1”. If the probability variation symbol is, for example, “7UF” (when a reach of “7” is established in the upper row), “*” between “6” and “7” is determined as the middle symbol in the upper row. In the case of the variation pattern of variation number 90 (the variation pattern of “Super A-1”), the probability variation symbol determined in step S1137 is, for example, “3SF” (“3” and “4” double reach is established. ), “*” Between “3” and “4” is determined as the middle symbol in the middle.

  If double reach is established (if the reach symbol determined in step S1133 is a double reach symbol, if the double reach symbol is determined in steps S1137 and S1138), the symbol specified by the variation pattern is used. If the difference (design difference with respect to the reach symbol for the later symbol) is “−2”, the middle symbol on the reach line becomes the same symbol as the first symbol and becomes a big hit symbol. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when double reach can be established, the symbol difference designated by the variation pattern is not set to “−2”.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a small hit symbol determination process. In the small hit symbol determination process, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the variation numbers 122 and 123 shown in FIG. 19 is received, and the small hit designation command (8C06 (H)) is received as the symbol information designation command. It is a process to be executed.

  In the small hit symbol determining process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a big hit symbol determining random number (step S1161). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the small hit symbol using the small bonus symbol selection table (K-1) shown in FIG. 80 according to the extracted random value (step S1162).

  In the small hit symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are allocated substantially evenly to the small hit symbols (small hit chance chances) shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the extracted random number value as the small hit symbol.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the provisionally determined symbol determination process (step S632). In the temporary determination symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S681). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for both a normal big hit / probability variation big hit or a sudden variation variation command for a sudden probability variation big hit / small hit (step S682).

  When the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpots (Y in step S682), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the common jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 67 according to the random number value extracted in step S681. Using the selection table (F-1), the uncertain variable symbol is tentatively determined and stored (step S683). On the other hand, when the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for both sudden and promising large hits / small hits (N in step S682), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the small change shown in FIG. A small winning symbol is temporarily determined and stored using the winning symbol selection table (K-1) (step S684).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a command non-reception flag indicating that the symbol information designation command has not been received (step S685).

  In the above provisionally determined symbol determination process, the non-probable variable symbol is determined using the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 67. However, the table for determining the non-probable variable symbol is variable. Based on the contents of the pattern command, the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 67, the single jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 70, the double hit jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 73, and shown in FIG. You may make it use the jackpot symbol selection table for double rear hits properly. Further, in the above tentatively determined symbol determination process, the chance eye A and the chance eye using the chance eye A selection table (FIG. 52) and the chance eye B selection table (FIG. 57) according to the contents of the variation pattern command. Processing for selecting and displaying B may be executed.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the third probability variation design determination process (step S637). In the third probability variation symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S691). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a probable variation symbol using the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 68 according to the random number value (step S692). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game.

  Next, the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 3, 4, 23, 40, 41, 63, 64, 84 to 86, 100, 113, 114) after the normal fluctuation is displayed is displayed. Timing and effects will be described.

  FIG. 83 is a timing chart showing the fluctuation timing when the chance stop is developed to super reach. As shown in FIG. 83, only the “normal variation” is performed in the variation pattern of the normal variation (variation pattern of variation number 1) that is not accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A at the time of non-reach. Specifically, when the decorative design starts to change, the rate of change is gradually increased from the state in which the left, middle, and right decorative designs are stopped, and the change is performed for a predetermined time while the change rate is high. Thereafter, for example, the fluctuating speed is lowered in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol is stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 83, the disparity lines other than the chance line of “1, 4, 5” are stopped and displayed. At this time, it is controlled so that the chance eye is not determined as a stop symbol by the prohibition process. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern of the short-time normal fluctuation (variation pattern of fluctuation number 2) without stopping the chance eye A when non-reach is lost is the fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation (variation pattern of fluctuation number 1). Is only short. For example, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation (fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 1) is 8 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation at time reduction (variation pattern of fluctuation number 2) is 4 seconds.

  In the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation (fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 3) accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A at the time of non-reach deviation, the normal fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation of the left, right and right decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds) from the fluctuation start After that, for example, the fluctuating speed is lowered in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol is stopped. At this time, the chance eye A is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 83, the chance item A (34C in FIG. 5) of “2, 3, 4” is stopped and displayed. Then, a dummy effect (see FIG. 85) that seems to develop into super reach is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second. Then, the chance eye A does not develop into super reach and remains as a stop symbol. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern of the short time normal fluctuation (variation pattern of fluctuation number 4) accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A at the time of non-reach is more than the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation (variation pattern of fluctuation number 3). For example, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation fluctuation pattern (variation pattern of fluctuation number 3) is 9 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation fluctuation pattern (variation pattern of fluctuation number 4) is short. Is 5 seconds.

  Among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by super reach at the time of the loss of reach, the fluctuation pattern involving the stop of the chance eye A (the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 23) is a normal fluctuation (decoration of left middle right) for a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds) from the fluctuation start. After that, the symbols are changed in order of the left symbol, the right symbol, the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol is stopped. At this time, the chance eye A is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 83, the chance item A (34C in FIG. 5) of “2, 3, 4” is stopped and displayed. Then, the development effect (see FIG. 84) that develops into super reach is executed for a predetermined period (2 seconds). Then, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol changes again, and the left and right symbols stop at the same symbol and develop into Super Reach B. Thereafter, after a change in the super reach B is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 13 seconds), the middle symbol is stopped and the stopped symbol is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 83, the middle symbol is stopped at the symbol “*” that is shifted by one frame from the reach symbol, and the stopped symbol “3 * 3” is confirmed.

  Among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by super reach at the time of the loss of reach, the fluctuation pattern involving the stop of the chance eye B (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation numbers 40 and 41) is a normal fluctuation (left middle right) for a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds) from the fluctuation start. After that, the decorative pattern is stopped by decreasing the changing speed in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. At this time, chance chance B is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 83, the chance item B (38C in FIG. 6) of “6, 7, 8” is stopped and displayed. Then, the development effect (see FIG. 84) that develops into super reach is executed for a predetermined period (2 seconds). Then, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is changed again, and the left and right symbols are stopped at the same symbol and developed into super reach D. Thereafter, after the change of the super reach D is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 17 seconds), the middle symbol is stopped and the stopped symbol is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 83, the middle symbol is stopped at the symbol “*” that is shifted by one frame from the reach symbol, and the stopped symbol “3 * 3” is confirmed.

  Among the variation patterns with super reach at the big hit, the variation pattern with variation of the chance eyes A (variation patterns of variation numbers 63, 64, and 100) has a normal variation (middle left) for a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds) from the variation start. The right decorative pattern is changed at high speed), and then the decorative pattern is stopped by decreasing the changing speed in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. At this time, the chance eye A is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 83, the chance item A (34C in FIG. 5) of “2, 3, 4” is stopped and displayed. Then, the development effect (see FIG. 84) that develops into super reach is executed for a predetermined period (2 seconds). Then, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol changes again, and the left and right symbols stop at the same symbol and develop into Super Reach B. Thereafter, after a change in the super reach B is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 13 seconds), the middle symbol is stopped and the stopped symbol is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 83, the probability variation symbol “3, 3, 3” is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol stop symbol.

  Among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by super reach at the time of big hit, the fluctuation pattern (variation patterns of fluctuation numbers 84 to 86, 113, 114) accompanied by the stop of the chance eye B is a normal fluctuation (for example, 8 seconds) from the start of fluctuation ( After that, the left and right decorative symbols are changed at high speed), and thereafter, the changing rate is decreased in the order of left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol, and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this time, chance chance B is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 83, the chance item B (38C in FIG. 6) of “6, 7, 8” is stopped and displayed. Then, the development effect (see FIG. 84) that develops into super reach is executed for a predetermined period (2 seconds). Then, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is changed again, and the left and right symbols are stopped at the same symbol and developed into super reach D. Thereafter, after the change of the super reach D is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 17 seconds), the middle symbol is stopped and the stopped symbol is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 83, the probability variation symbol “3, 3, 3” is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol stop symbol.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 83, a fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation (a fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 1) not accompanied by a stop of the chance eye A when non-reach is off, and a stop of the chance eye A when non-reach is off. Normal fluctuation pattern (variation pattern with fluctuation number 3), fluctuation pattern with super-reach when reach is lost, fluctuation pattern with chances A and B being stopped (variation patterns with fluctuation numbers 23, 40, and 41) , And a variation pattern that accompanies the stop of chances A and B (variation patterns of variation numbers 63, 64, 84 to 86, 100, 113, and 114) among the variation patterns that accompany super reach at the time of big hit, The period in which the normal fluctuation is performed is the same period (for example, 8 seconds).

  Further, among the fluctuation patterns with super reach when the reach is lost, the fluctuation patterns with the chances A and B being stopped (variation patterns with fluctuation numbers 23, 40, and 41), and the fluctuation pattern with super reach at the big hit In any of the fluctuation patterns (variation patterns of fluctuation numbers 63, 64, 84 to 86, 100, 113, 114) accompanied by the stop of chance eyes A and B, the period during which the development effect is performed is the same period (for example, 2 seconds).

  In addition, regarding the period when super reach fluctuation occurs, the period of super reach fluctuation differs depending on the type of super reach, but in the case of the same type of super reach, super reach The period during which these changes occur is the same. For example, it is 11 seconds for Super Reach A, 13 seconds for Super Reach B, 15 seconds for Super Reach C, and 17 seconds for Super Reach D.

  In the case of the same type of super reach, the period during which the super reach is changed may be varied depending on whether it is out of play or a big hit. For example, assuming that the fluctuation time when the single reach super reach is the standard fluctuation time (for example, 15 seconds), if the deviation is −1, the time for the production of one symbol is longer than the standard fluctuation time. Becomes shorter (for example, 14 seconds), and when it is deviated from +1, it becomes longer than the standard fluctuation time (for example, 16 seconds) by the time of the stage effect for one symbol. Also, assuming that the fluctuation time when the double reach super reach is the first change is the standard fluctuation time (for example, 15 seconds), if the deviation is -1, the standard fluctuation time is the same as the time of production for one symbol. Is shorter (for example, 14 seconds), the deviation time for one symbol is longer than the standard variation time (for example, 16 seconds) when it is off +1, and for the second symbol, it is The time is longer than the standard fluctuation time (for example, 17 seconds).

  FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect of a variation pattern when the chance stop is developed to super reach. When the variation of the decorative design is started, as shown in FIG. 84, the variation is performed for a predetermined time while the variation speed of the left middle right decorative design is increased. Then, the left symbol “2” stops in the middle display area, the right symbol “4” stops in the middle display area, the middle symbol “3” stops in the middle display area, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. . At this time, since the stop symbol “2, 3, 4” is stopped in the middle display area of the left middle right, the chance eye A (34C in FIG. 5) is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the decorative pattern on the left middle right, different characters are associated with the symbols of the numbers. In the example shown in FIG. 84, “girl character A” is associated with symbol “2”, “cat character” is associated with symbol “3”, and “girl character” is associated with symbol “3”. “B” is associated. In this embodiment, animal characters are associated with odd symbols, and human characters are associated with even symbols.

  In the case of a fluctuation pattern that develops from the stop of the chance eye A to the super reach (super reach B), as shown in FIG. 84, after the fluctuation fluctuation is performed for a predetermined period, the super reach is developed. In the example shown in FIG. 84, when the “cat character” associated with the middle symbol “3” comes out of the symbol, the left and right symbols are aligned with “3”, and the middle symbol is re-variable, resulting in super reach (Nyanyan Reach). ).

  Note that, in this embodiment, the super-reach of the production mode according to the medium symbol character (character associated with the middle symbol number) when the chance eye is stopped is developed. In the example shown in FIG. 84, since the medium symbol character when the chance eye A is stopped is a cat character, the super-reach develops to “Nyan Nyan Reach” in which the cat character operates. Although not shown in FIG. 84, for example, when “1, 2, 3” is stopped as the chance eye A, the character with the middle symbol is the girl character A, so the super reach where the girl character A operates To develop.

  When it develops into super reach, the production of tilting action that makes the player expect big hits is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 84, there is an effect in which a cat character scratches and destroys a numerical design. When the finally confirmed (determined) number of the middle symbol is the same as the reach symbol number, it is a big hit, and when the finally confirmed middle symbol number is different from the reach symbol number, the number is lost. In the example shown in FIG. 84, since the finally determined middle symbol “3” is the same as the reach symbol “3”, it is a big hit.

  In FIG. 84, since the chance A is stopped to a single reach super reach, the game is a big hit, and the relief effect (relief effect) and the re-lottery effect are not executed. It is an effect based on the fluctuation pattern (an effect that develops from a stop at chance eye A to a super reach B of single reach and a big hit).

  In this embodiment, when the chance eye A is stopped, it develops to super reach B, and when the chance eye B stops, it develops to super reach D. Further, in this embodiment, as described above, it develops into a super-reach of an effect mode according to the character of the medium symbol when the chance eye is stopped. For example, when the chance symbol A is stopped and the middle symbol is “2”, the effect of super reach B in which the character (girl character A) associated with the symbol “2” operates is executed, and the chance symbol When the middle symbol when A is stopped is “4”, the effect of super reach B in which the character associated with the symbol “4” (a girl character B different from the girl character A) operates is executed. The Further, when the middle symbol when the chance eye A is stopped is “1”, the effect of the super reach B in which the character (animal character M) associated with the symbol “1” operates is executed, and the chance eye When the middle symbol when A is stopped is “5”, the effect of super reach B in which the character (animal character N different from the animal character M) associated with the symbol “5” operates is executed. The

  FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect of the variation pattern when the chance stop is not developed to super reach. As in the case shown in FIG. 84, when the decorative symbol variation is started, the variation is performed for a predetermined time in a state where the variation speed of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is high. Then, the left symbol “2” stops in the middle display area, the right symbol “4” stops in the middle display area, the middle symbol “3” stops in the middle display area, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. . At this time, since the stop symbol “2, 3, 4” is stopped in the middle display area of the left middle right, the chance eye A (34C in FIG. 5) is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of a variation pattern that does not develop from supervision of chance eye A to super reach, as shown in FIG. 85, after a fluctuation is performed for a predetermined period, a dummy effect that appears to develop to super reach is developed. The In the example shown in FIG. 85, the “cat character” associated with the middle symbol “3” is likely to escape from the symbol but does not escape, and the chance eye A “2, 3, 4” is confirmed as the stop symbol, It is out of place.

  In this way, if the fluctuation pattern does not develop from the stop of the chance eye A to the super reach, after the chance eye A is derived and displayed, the dummy effect that does not develop appears to be developed to the super reach. When A is derived and displayed, the player can expect the occurrence of a big hit (development to super reach) and improve the interest of the game. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 84, after the chance eye A stops, the cat escapes from the symbol and develops into super reach. However, in the example shown in FIG. 85, the cat moves and moves after the chance eye A stops. I'm about to get out of it. Therefore, even if the development does not develop into super reach, the production after stopping chance item A is similar to the production after stopping chance item A. The expectation of the big hit can be raised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, a dummy effect corresponding to the medium symbol character when the chance eye is stopped is executed. For example, if the medium symbol when the chance eye A is stopped is “2”, the character (girl character A) associated with the symbol “2” operates to develop a super reach B. When the middle symbol when the chance eye A is stopped is “4”, the character associated with the symbol “4” (a girl character B different from the girl character A) operates to super A dummy production that is likely to develop into a reach is performed. Further, when the middle symbol when the chance eye A is stopped is “1”, the dummy effect that the character (animal character M) associated with the symbol “1” is likely to operate and develop into super reach B. When the middle symbol when the chance eye A is stopped is “5”, the character associated with the symbol “5” (animal character N different from the animal character M) operates to super A dummy effect that is likely to develop into reach B is executed.

  Next, a description will be given of variation timings and effects of variation patterns in which the reach loss appearance stops after a normal reach change (including those that develop into super reach after stop of the reach lose appearance).

  FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing the fluctuation timing when the reach loss outcome is stopped. As shown in FIG. 86, only the “normal fluctuation” is performed in the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation at the time of non-reach deviation (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 1). Specifically, when the decorative design starts to change, the rate of change is gradually increased from the state in which the left, middle, and right decorative designs are stopped, and the change is performed for a predetermined time while the change rate is high. Thereafter, for example, the fluctuating speed is lowered in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol is stopped.

  In the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 5) that designates “normal-2” at the time of reach loss, after normal fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern on the left middle right) is performed in a predetermined period from the start of fluctuation, The left symbol is stopped, the right symbol of the same symbol as the left symbol is stopped on the reach line to reach reach, and “normal reach” is changed. In the example shown in FIG. 86, “7” is stopped in the middle of the left display area, “7” is stopped in the middle of the right display area, and reach (single reach) occurs in the middle reach line. , “Normal reach” changes.

  When normal reach occurs, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol becomes low from a predetermined frame before the reach symbol. In this embodiment, the rate of change of the middle symbol is low, for example, 11 symbols before the reach symbol (for example, the symbol “*” between “1” and “2” if the reach symbol is “7”). It has become. In the variation pattern of “normal-2”, since the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols) is “−2”, the middle symbol is stopped at “6”, and is lost. The stop symbol “7, 6, 7” of the decorative symbol at this time is the reach lose appearance (reach non-specific display result).

  Even in the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 7) that designates “normal + 1” at the time of reach deviation, after normal fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern on the middle left and right) is performed in a predetermined period from the start of fluctuation, The left symbol is stopped, the right symbol of the same symbol as the left symbol is stopped on the reach line to reach reach, and “normal reach” is changed. In the example shown in FIG. 86, “7” is stopped in the middle of the left display area, “7” is stopped in the middle of the right display area, and reach (single reach) occurs in the middle reach line. ing.

  When normal reach occurs, the changing speed of the middle symbol is reduced from a predetermined frame before the reach symbol (for example, 11 frames before). For example, if the reach symbol is “7”, the fluctuation rate of the middle symbol from the symbol “*” between “1” and “2” becomes low. In this embodiment, the change speed of the middle symbol is always low from the reach symbol to the fixed number of frames (11 frames). And in the variation pattern of “Normal + 1”, the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols) is “+1”, so the middle symbol stops at “*” between “7” and “8”. It will be off. The stop pattern “7 * 7” of the decorative pattern at this time is the reach lose.

  Since the fluctuation speed of the medium symbol during the fluctuation of the normal reach is constant (low speed), the fluctuation time of the normal reach varies depending on the number of frames in which the middle symbol advances (moves) from when the normal reach occurs until it stops. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern of “Normal-2”, the number of frames in which the middle symbol progresses from when normal reach occurs until it stops is 9 frames (from “*” between “1” and “2”). In the fluctuation pattern of “Normal + 1”, the number of frames in which the middle symbol proceeds from the occurrence of normal reach to the stop is 12 frames (“*” between “1” and “2”). ”To“ * ”between“ 7 ”and“ 8 ”), the variation pattern of“ normal + 1 ”has a longer variation time than the variation pattern of“ normal-2 ”. That is, as shown in FIG. 86, the fluctuation time becomes longer by the time during which the middle symbol progresses from “6” to “*” (“*” between “7” and “8”) at low speed.

  Even in the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9) that designates “Super A-2” at the time of the loss of reach, normal fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation of the left middle right decorative pattern) was performed in a predetermined period from the start of fluctuation. After that, the left symbol is stopped, the right symbol of the same symbol as the left symbol is stopped on the reach line to reach, and “normal reach” is changed. In the example shown in FIG. 86, similarly, “7” is stopped in the middle of the left display area, “7” is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right display area, and reach (single reach) is performed in the middle reach line. Has occurred.

  When normal reach occurs, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol becomes low from a predetermined frame (11 frames) before the reach symbol. In the variation pattern of “Super A-2”, since the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols) is “−2”, the middle symbol stops at “6”. The stop symbol “7, 6, 7” of the decorative symbol at this time is the reach lose.

  After that, after reaching a reach loss, it is stopped for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and then the middle symbol is re-variable to develop into super reach A. After the change of the super reach A is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 11 seconds), the middle symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, when the reach is lost, the same symbol as the middle symbol ("6" in the example of FIG. 86) temporarily stopped before the development of super reach (after the end of normal reach) At the end of the change). Therefore, the stop symbol “7, 6, 7” of the decorative symbol is stopped at the end of the change. The stop symbol “7, 6. 7” of the decorative symbol at this time is also a reach lose.

  Even in the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 12) that designates “super A + 1” at the time of reach deviation, after normal fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern on the left middle right) is performed in a predetermined period from the start of fluctuation, The left symbol is stopped, the right symbol of the same symbol as the left symbol is stopped on the reach line to reach reach, and “normal reach” is changed. In the example shown in FIG. 86, “7” is stopped in the middle of the left display area, “7” is stopped in the middle of the right display area, and reach (single reach) occurs in the middle reach line. ing.

  When normal reach occurs, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol becomes low from a predetermined frame (11 frames) before the reach symbol. In the variation pattern of “Super A + 1”, since the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols) is “+1”, the middle symbol stops at “*” between “7” and “8”. . The stop pattern “7 * 7” of the decorative pattern at this time is the reach lose.

  After that, after reaching a reach loss, it is stopped for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and then the middle symbol is re-variable to develop into super reach A. After the change of the super reach A is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 11 seconds), the middle symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, when the reach is lost, the middle symbol temporarily suspended before the development of the super reach (after the end of the normal reach) (“*” between “7” and “8” in the example of FIG. 86). The same symbol is stopped after super reach (at the end of change). Accordingly, the decorative symbol stop symbol “7 * 7” is stopped at the end of the change. The stop pattern “7 * 7” of the decorative pattern at this time is also a reach lose.

  In this embodiment, in the case of a variation pattern in which the relief effect or the redrawing effect is not executed, the variation time of the normal variation (period in which the normal variation is performed) and the variation time of the super reach A (the variation of the super reach A is performed). (Period) is constant, the difference in the fluctuation time of the normal reach (period in which the fluctuation of the normal reach is performed) becomes the difference in the fluctuation time of the entire fluctuation pattern. For example, in the variation pattern of “Super A-2”, the number of frames in which the middle symbol progresses from when normal reach occurs until it stops is 9 frames, and in the variation pattern of “Super A + 1”, normal reach occurs. Since the number of frames in which the middle symbol progresses from the start to the stop is 12 frames, the variation pattern of “Super A + 1” is the overall variation time (normal reach variation time) than the variation pattern of “Super A-2” Becomes longer. That is, as shown in FIG. 86, the entire fluctuation time becomes longer by the time during which the middle symbol progresses from “6” to “*” (“*” between “7” and “8”) at low speed. Yes.

  Even in the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 15) that designates “Super B-2” at the time of the loss of reach, normal fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern on the middle left and right) was performed in a predetermined period from the start of fluctuation. After that, the left symbol is stopped, the right symbol of the same symbol as the left symbol is stopped on the reach line to reach, and “normal reach” is changed. In the example shown in FIG. 86, “7” is stopped in the middle of the left display area, “7” is stopped in the middle of the right display area, and reach (single reach) occurs in the middle reach line. ing.

  When normal reach occurs, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol becomes low from a predetermined frame (11 frames) before the reach symbol. In the variation pattern of “Super B-2”, since the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols) is “−2”, the middle symbol stops at “6”. The stop symbol “7, 6, 7” of the decorative symbol at this time is the reach lose.

  Then, after reaching a reach loss, it stops for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and then the middle symbol is re-variable to develop into super reach B. After the change of the super reach B is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 13 seconds), the middle symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, when the reach is lost, the same symbol as the middle symbol ("6" in the example of FIG. 86) temporarily stopped before the development of super reach (after the end of normal reach) At the end of the change). Therefore, the stop symbol “7, 6, 7” of the decorative symbol is stopped at the end of the change. The stop symbol “7, 6. 7” of the decorative symbol at this time is also a reach lose.

  Even in the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 18) that designates “super B + 1” at the time of reach deviation, after normal fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern on the left middle right) has been performed in a predetermined period from the start of fluctuation, The left symbol is stopped, the right symbol of the same symbol as the left symbol is stopped on the reach line to reach reach, and “normal reach” is changed. In the example shown in FIG. 86, “7” is stopped in the middle of the left display area, “7” is stopped in the middle of the right display area, and reach (single reach) occurs in the middle reach line. ing.

  When normal reach occurs, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol becomes low from a predetermined frame (11 frames) before the reach symbol. In the variation pattern of “Super B + 1”, since the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols) is “+1”, the middle symbol stops at “*” between “7” and “8”. . The stop pattern “7 * 7” of the decorative pattern at this time is the reach lose.

  Then, after reaching a reach loss, it stops for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and then the middle symbol is re-variable to develop into super reach B. After the change of the super reach A is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 11 seconds), the middle symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, when the reach is lost, the middle symbol temporarily suspended before the development of the super reach (after the end of the normal reach) (“*” between “7” and “8” in the example of FIG. 86). The same symbol is stopped after super reach (at the end of change). Accordingly, the decorative symbol stop symbol “7 * 7” is stopped at the end of the change. The stop pattern “7 * 7” of the decorative pattern at this time is also a reach lose.

  In this embodiment, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the relief effect or the re-drawing effect is not executed, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation (period in which the normal fluctuation is performed) and the fluctuation time of the super reach B (the fluctuation of the super reach B are performed). (Period) is constant, the difference in the fluctuation time of the normal reach (period in which the fluctuation of the normal reach is performed) becomes the difference in the fluctuation time of the entire fluctuation pattern. For example, in the variation pattern of “Super B-2”, the number of frames in which the middle symbol progresses from when normal reach occurs until it stops is 9 frames, and in the variation pattern of “Super B + 1”, normal reach occurs. Since the number of frames in which the middle symbol progresses from the start to the stop is 12 frames, the variation pattern of “Super B + 1” is the total variation time (normal reach variation time) than the variation pattern of “Super B-2” Becomes longer. That is, as shown in FIG. 86, the entire fluctuation time becomes longer by the time during which the middle symbol progresses from “6” to “*” (“*” between “7” and “8”) at low speed. Yes.

  Even in the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 21) that designates “Super B-2 relief loss” at the time of loss of reach, normal fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern on the left middle right) is performed in a predetermined period from the start of fluctuation. After the break, the left symbol is stopped, the right symbol of the same symbol as the left symbol is stopped on the reach line to reach, and the “normal reach” change is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 86, “7” is stopped in the middle of the left display area, “7” is stopped in the middle of the right display area, and reach (single reach) occurs in the middle reach line. ing.

  When normal reach occurs, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol becomes low from a predetermined frame (11 frames) before the reach symbol. In the variation pattern of “Super B-2 relief loss”, the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols) is “−2”, so the middle symbol stops at “6”. The stop symbol “7, 6, 7” of the decorative symbol at this time is the reach lose.

  Then, after reaching a reach loss, it stops for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and then the middle symbol is re-variable to develop into super reach B. In this embodiment, even in the variation pattern of “Super B-2 relief loss”, the variation pattern of “Super A-2” or “Super B-2” (the variation pattern of the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol is −2) It develops into super reach at the same time. After the change of the super reach B is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 13 seconds), the middle symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, when a relief loss effect is executed when a single reach occurs (when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with a single reach and a fluctuation pattern that executes the relief loss effect), automatic Specifically, the symbol two frames before the reach symbol is determined as the middle symbol that temporarily stops before the relief loss effect is performed (after the super reach is completed) (see step S1026). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 86, the middle symbol “6” is temporarily stopped at the middle stage after the change of the super reach B. In this embodiment, when the relief loss effect is executed when double reach occurs, the symbol immediately before the reach symbol is automatically displayed before the relief loss effect is executed (after the super reach is completed). ) To be temporarily stopped (see step S1026).

  Then, when the transition to the relief loss effect is made, after “7, 6. 7” is temporarily stopped for a while, the reach loss appearance (reach loss symbol) appears to be changed to a big hit symbol, and an effect that does not change is executed. As a result, the reach lose point “7, 6, 7” is stopped and the result is lost. The execution period of the relief loss effect is set to 3 seconds, for example. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of “Super B-2 relief loss” at the time of loss is the execution time of “Relief loss effect” at the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of “Super B-2” at the time of loss. Time is added.

  Even in the variation pattern (variation pattern of variation number 42) designating “normal” at the time of the big hit, after the normal variation (high-speed variation of the left middle right decorative design) is performed for a predetermined period from the start of the variation, Is stopped, the right symbol of the same symbol as the left symbol is stopped on the reach line to reach, and the variation of “normal reach” is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 86, “7” is stopped in the middle of the left display area, “7” is stopped in the middle of the right display area, and reach (single reach) occurs in the middle reach line. ing.

  When normal reach occurs, the changing speed of the middle symbol is reduced from a predetermined frame before the reach symbol (for example, 11 frames before). For example, if the reach symbol is “7”, the fluctuation rate of the middle symbol from the symbol “*” between “1” and “2” becomes low. Then, in the variation pattern of “normal” at the time of big hit, the middle symbol stops at “7” at the end of the fluctuation of normal reach and becomes a big hit. That is, in the variation pattern of “normal” at the time of big hit, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols) of the middle symbol is “0”.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation speed of the medium symbol during the fluctuation of the normal reach is constant (low speed), the number of frames in which the middle symbol advances (advances) from when the normal reach occurs until it stops. The fluctuation time of normal reach changes by. Here, in the variation pattern of “normal” at the time of the big hit, the number of frames in which the middle symbol proceeds from the occurrence of normal reach to the stop is 11 frames, so that the normal reach than the variation pattern of “normal-2”. The fluctuation time is longer, and the fluctuation time of normal reach is shorter than the fluctuation pattern of “normal + 1”.

  Even in the variation pattern (variation pattern with variation number 44) designating “Super A-2” at the time of big hit, after normal variation (high-speed variation of the left middle right decorative design) is performed in a predetermined period from the start of variation The left symbol is stopped, the right symbol of the same symbol as the left symbol is stopped on the reach line to reach, and “normal reach” is changed. In the example shown in FIG. 86, “7” is stopped in the middle of the left display area, “7” is stopped in the middle of the right display area, and reach (single reach) occurs in the middle reach line. ing.

  When normal reach occurs, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol becomes low from a predetermined frame (11 frames) before the reach symbol. Even in the variation pattern of “Super A-2” at the time of big hit, since the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols) is “−2”, the middle symbol stops at “6”. The stop symbol “7, 6, 7” of the decorative symbol at this time is the reach lose.

  Note that in the variation pattern of “Super A-2” at the time of big hit, the number of frames in which the middle symbol progresses from when normal reach occurs until it stops, so “Super A-2” at the time of loss ”Or“ Super B-2 ”variation pattern (variation pattern having a design difference of −2), and the normal reach variation time in“ Super A-2 ”or“ Super B-2 ” It is the same time.

  After that, after reaching a reach loss, it is stopped for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and then the middle symbol is re-variable to develop into super reach A. After the change of the super reach A is performed for a predetermined period, the middle symbol stops at “7”. In this embodiment, the variation time of the super reach A at the time of the big hit (period in which the super reach A is executed) is set to the same time as the variation time of the super reach A at the time of loss. However, the variation time of the super reach A at the time of the big hit may be different from the variation time of the super reach A at the time of big hit. For example, the middle symbol “6” stops at the middle line in the super reach A when the break occurs, whereas the middle symbol “7” stops at the middle line in the super reach A at the big hit. The variation time may be lengthened by the amount of variation from “” to “7”.

  Even in the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 54) that designates “Super B-2” at the time of big hit, after normal fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation of the left middle right decorative pattern) is performed in a predetermined period from the start of fluctuation The left symbol is stopped, the right symbol of the same symbol as the left symbol is stopped on the reach line to reach, and “normal reach” is changed. In the example shown in FIG. 86, “7” is stopped in the middle of the left display area, “7” is stopped in the middle of the right display area, and reach (single reach) occurs in the middle reach line. ing.

  When normal reach occurs, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol becomes low from a predetermined frame (11 frames) before the reach symbol. In the variation pattern of “Super B-2” at the time of the big hit, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols) of the middle symbol is “−2”, so that the middle symbol stops at “6”. The stop symbol “7, 6, 7” of the decorative symbol at this time is the reach lose.

  Even in the variation pattern of “Super B-2” at the time of big hit, the number of frames in which the middle symbol progresses from when normal reach occurs until it stops is 9 frames, so “Super A−” 2 ”and“ Super B-2 ”variation patterns, and the variation pattern of“ Super A-2 ”at the time of big hit (variation pattern with a symbol difference of −2), and the variation of normal reach in these variation patterns It is the same time as time.

  Then, after reaching a reach loss, it stops for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and then the middle symbol is re-variable to develop into super reach B. After the change of the super reach B is performed for a predetermined period, the middle symbol stops at “7”. In this embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation time of the super reach B at the time of the big hit (period in which the super reach B is executed) is the same as the fluctuation time of the super reach B at the time of loss. . However, the variation time of the super reach B at the time of the big hit may be different from the variation time of the super reach B at the time of big hit. For example, medium symbol “6” stops at the middle line in Super Reach B at the time of loss, whereas medium symbol “7” stops at the middle line in Super Reach B at the big hit. The variation time may be lengthened by the amount of variation from “” to “7”.

  Even in the variation pattern (variation pattern of variation number 57) that designates “Super B-2 bailout” at the time of big hit, normal variation (high-speed variation of the decorative pattern on the left middle right) is performed within a predetermined period from the start of variation. After that, the left symbol is stopped, the right symbol of the same symbol as the left symbol is stopped on the reach line to reach, and “normal reach” is changed. In the example shown in FIG. 86, “7” is stopped in the middle of the left display area, “7” is stopped in the middle of the right display area, and reach (single reach) occurs in the middle reach line. ing.

  When normal reach occurs, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol becomes low from a predetermined frame (11 frames) before the reach symbol. And even in the variation pattern of “Super B-2 bailout” at the time of big hit, since the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol (left and right symbols) is “−2”, the middle symbol stops at “6”. . The stop symbol “7, 6, 7” of the decorative symbol at this time is the reach lose.

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern of “Super B-2 bailout” at the time of big hit, the number of frames in which the middle symbol advances from the occurrence of normal reach to the stop is nine, so the “super” The variation pattern of “A-2” or “Super B-2”, the variation pattern of “Super A-2” at the time of big hit (variation pattern with a symbol difference of −2), etc. It is the same time as the fluctuation time of normal reach.

  Then, after reaching a reach loss, it stops for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and then the middle symbol is re-variable to develop into super reach B. After the change of the super reach B is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 13 seconds), the middle symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, when a single relief occurs, when the relief per effect is executed (when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with a single reach and is a fluctuation pattern that executes the relief per production), automatic Specifically, the symbol two frames before the reach symbol is determined as the middle symbol that is temporarily stopped before the execution of the rescue per unit effect (after the super reach is completed) (see step S1047). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 86, the middle symbol “6” is temporarily stopped at the middle stage after the change of the super reach B. In this embodiment, when the double-reach occurs, when the relief per unit effect is executed, the symbol one frame before the reach symbol is automatically executed before the execution of the per unit relief unit (after the super reach is completed). ) To be temporarily stopped (see step S1047).

  Then, when the transition is made to the per-relief effect, “7 · 6 · 7” is temporarily stopped for a while, and then the effect of changing the reach lose point (reach miss symbol) to the big hit symbol is executed, and the big hit symbol “7”・ 7 ・ 7 」will be stopped and it will be a big hit. In addition, the execution period of the per-relief effect is, for example, 3 seconds. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of “Super B-2 bailout” at the time of big hit is the execution time of “benefit per relief” at the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of “Super B-2” at the big win. Time is added.

  86, the fluctuation pattern of super reach C or super reach D is not shown, but only the fluctuation time of super reach C or super reach D is different from the fluctuation time of super reach A or super reach D (for example, The fluctuation time of Super Reach C is 15 seconds, the fluctuation time of Super Reach D is 17 seconds), the fluctuation time of normal fluctuation is the same as other fluctuation patterns, and the fluctuation time of normal reach is also different Similarly to the variation pattern, the time according to the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol of the middle symbol is set.

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of normal reach when the reach loss is stopped and the super reach is developed. When the variation of the decorative symbol is started, the variation speed is increased from the state where the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped, and the variation is performed for a predetermined time in a state where the variation rate becomes high. Then, the fluctuation rate becomes lower than the symbol “8” which is two frames before the symbol “7” which is the left symbol, the symbol “7” stops at the middle stage, and the fluctuation variation starts. Next, the right symbol is the symbol “6” which is two frames before the stop symbol “7”, and the fluctuation speed becomes low, the stop symbol “7” stops at the middle stage, and the fluctuation variation starts. At this time, when the left and right symbols are in the middle stage and stop at the same symbol “7”, reach is established in the middle line, and the fluctuation of the normal reach is started. When normal reach fluctuation starts, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode of the lamp / LED are changed.

  Then, the fluctuating speed becomes lower than the symbol (“*” next to “1”) 11 frames before the middle symbol is the reach symbol (“7”). Note that the background color of the background image (for example, the “sky” color of the background) is blue (daytime) during normal fluctuation and normal reach fluctuation. Then, the middle symbol “7” passes the position of the middle stage effective line one frame, and the temporary stop symbol (“*” next to “7”) temporarily stops on the middle stage effective line. In this case, a variation pattern in which the symbol difference between the reach symbol and the middle symbol is “+1”. In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the non-normal reach, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined here, and the variation is finished.

  In the case of developing to super reach, after the fluctuation of shaking is performed, the middle symbol is changed again to develop to super reach. At this time, the background color of the background image (the background color of the entire screen) changes to black. In addition, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode of the lamp / LED are changed. In the present embodiment, the reach 1-1 (for example, super reach A), the reach 1-2 (for example, super reach A for executing a relief effect), the reach 2-1 (for example, super reach B) or the like based on the variation pattern. The case where it develops to either reach 2-2 (for example, super reach B which performs relief production) is explained.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing a production aspect of super reach (reach 1-1) in the case of development from stop of reach loss to super reach. When the middle symbol is changed again and develops to super reach A (reach 1-1), the effect of tilting operation in super reach A is started. When the tilt operation is performed, the background color of the background image changes from black to red. In the production of the tilt movement, a girl character appears and hits the middle symbol “5” to break it. The girl character hits the next medium symbol “6” to break it. Then, the middle symbol is determined as “7”. Thereby, the big hit symbol of “777” is derived and displayed, and the big hit is determined.

  FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing a production aspect of super reach (reach 1-2) in the case of development from stop of reach loss to super reach. When the middle symbol is changed again to develop the super reach A (reach 1-2) for executing the relief effect, the tilt operation effect in the super reach A is started. When the tilt operation is performed, the background color of the background image changes from black to red. In the production of the tilting action, as in FIG. 88, a girl character appears, hits the middle symbol “5” and breaks it, and hits the next middle symbol “6”. However, in the case shown in FIG. 89, the middle symbol “6” is not broken and the girl character gives up. At this time, the reach of “767” is temporarily stopped. Note that when the per-relief effect is not executed, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined here, and the variation ends. When the per-relief effect is executed, an ojisan character appears together with the sound effect “still more” from the speaker 27, and the relieved effect is executed. When the relief effect is executed, the background color of the background image changes from red to rainbow. In addition, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode of the lamp / LED are changed. In the relief effect, the old character kicks and destroys the middle symbol “6”. Then, the middle symbol is determined as “7”. Thereby, the big hit symbol of “777” is derived and displayed, and the big hit is determined.

  FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing a production aspect of super reach (reach 2-1) in the case of development from stop of reach loss to super reach. When the middle symbol re-varies and develops into super reach C (reach 2-1), the effect of tilting operation in super reach C is started. When the tilt operation is performed, the background color of the background image changes from black to red. In the direction of the tilt movement, a cannon comes out, and the cannon fires a ball on the middle symbol “5” and breaks it. The cannon also fires and breaks the ball on the next medium symbol “6”. Then, the middle symbol is determined as “7”. Thereby, the big hit symbol of “777” is derived and displayed, and the big hit is determined.

  FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing a production aspect of super reach (reach 2-2) in the case of developing from reach loss stop to super reach. When the middle symbol is changed again to develop the super reach C (reach 2-2) which executes the relief effect, the effect of the tilt operation in the super reach C is started. When the tilt operation is performed, the background color of the background image changes from black to red. In the direction of the tilt movement, as in FIG. 90, a cannon comes out, the cannon fires a ball on the middle symbol “5” and breaks it, and also fires a ball on the next middle symbol “6”. However, in the case shown in FIG. 91, the middle symbol “6” remains intact. At this time, the reach of “767” is temporarily stopped. Note that when the per-relief effect is not executed, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined here, and the variation ends. When the relief effect is executed, three cannons come out together with the sound effect “still more” from the speaker 27 and the relief effect is executed. When the relief effect is executed, the background color of the background image changes from red to rainbow. In addition, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode of the lamp / LED are changed. In the relief effect, each of the three cannons fires a ball on the middle symbol “6” and destroys the middle symbol “6”. Then, the middle symbol is determined as “7”. Thereby, the big hit symbol of “777” is derived and displayed, and the big hit is determined.

  Even when the relief losing effect is executed, three cannons appear together with a sound effect “still more” from the speaker 27, the background color of the background image changes from red to rainbow, and the sound effect (Fluctuation sound) and lighting of the lamp and LED are changed, but even if the three cannons fire their balls on the middle symbol “6”, the middle symbol “6” is not destroyed and the middle symbol is “6”. Confirm with. As a result, the reach-missed symbol of “767” is derived and displayed, and the offset is confirmed.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process. In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs one of steps S800 to S808 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) specifying a fluctuation pattern has been received by the command reception interrupt process. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern reception flag indicating that a variation pattern command has been received is set. The variation pattern reception flag is set in step S618 in the command analysis process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. In addition, a value corresponding to the variation time is set in the variation time timer, the process table to be used is selected, and the process timer setting value set at the beginning of the process table is set in the process timer.

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern, and monitors the end of the variation time.

  Decoration symbol variation stop process (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the ornament symbol and to derive and display the stop symbol (definite symbol) in response to the time-out of the variation time timer.

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, the big hit display is controlled. For example, when a fanfare command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Also, when a fanfare command designating sudden start of a probable big hit is received, a two-round effect is executed.

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a command for opening a special prize opening indicating that the special prize opening is open is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed. A re-lottery effect may be executed during a predetermined round. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the round in which the re-drawing effect is executed is determined in advance (for example, 7 rounds or 15 rounds).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the special prize opening is after being opened (closed) is received, an interval display or the like is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): Control of the big hit end display after the big hit game ends. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Note that a re-lottery effect may be executed during the ending effect.

  Small hit effect processing (step S808): After receiving the fanfare command designating the start of the small hit after the end of the variation time, the two round effect, which is the effect during the small hit, is executed.

  FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, each variation mode constituting the variation pattern is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the change mode. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the process table, and performs control for variably displaying the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  Similarly to the control based on the display control execution data, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lighting state of various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and the sound number Data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, in the case of a variation pattern of non-reach, including process data for executing normal variation (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data) and process data for executing a dummy effect, In the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the process data for executing the normal fluctuation and the process data for executing the normal reach fluctuation are included. In the case of the super reach fluctuation pattern, the process data for executing the normal fluctuation. Process data for executing normal reach fluctuations and process data for executing predetermined super reach fluctuations, and in the case of a super reach fluctuation pattern with a chance eye stop, in order to execute normal fluctuations To perform the process data and predetermined super reach variation of In the case of a super reach variation pattern including a relief effect, process data for executing normal variation, process data for executing normal reach variation, and predetermined super reach variation are executed. In the case of the super reach variation pattern including the process data for executing the predetermined relief effect and the process data for executing the predetermined relief effect, the process data for executing the normal variation and the normal reach variation are executed. Process data, process data for executing a predetermined super reach variation, and process data for executing a predetermined re-lottery effect.

  The process data shown in FIG. 93 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is selected (see step S821), and the rendering device is according to the process data set in the selected process table. (Step S823, etc.), but in the effect mode to be executed next when the process data is switched (for example, which super reach is executed, the relief effect is executed, or the re-lottery effect is executed) The corresponding process data may be selected (see step S835 or the like), and the rendering device may be controlled according to the selected process data.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S811). If it has been set, the flag is reset (step S812). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern of the decorative design based on the contents (variation number, variation time) designated by the variation pattern command (step S813). Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S814).

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first selects process data corresponding to the decorative symbol variation pattern to be used (step S821). Then, the process timer set value in the selected process data 1 is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S822). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the production device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step S823). For example, a control signal is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In addition, when displaying the temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol at a predetermined timing during the change, control is performed to temporarily display the temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol stored in the command analysis process.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a variation time timer (a timer according to the variation time of the decorative symbol) (step S824), and the value of the effect control process flag indicates the decorative symbol variation process (step S802). The value is updated (step S825).

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation processing, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation time timer has timed out (step S831). If the variation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S838).

  If the variation time timer has not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the process timer by 1 (step S832) and decrements the variation time timer by 1 (step S833). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data n (step S834). In addition, the microcomputer 100 for effect control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the content of the process data (process data including the re-draw effect) for executing the re-draw effect. By executing the control, the re-drawing effect during the change is executed. Also, the effects shown in FIGS. 83 to 91 are also executed in accordance with the contents of the process data in step S834.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S835), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S836). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S837).

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) instructing the decorative symbol variation stop is received (step S841). If the decorative symbol stop designation command has been received, control is performed to stop and display the decorative symbol stop symbol stored in the command analysis process (step S842).

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to stop and display the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the decorative symbol stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. The present invention is not limited to this, and control for stopping and displaying decorative symbols may be performed based on the time-up of the variable time timer.

  When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in step S842 is a small hit symbol (Y in step S843), the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the small hit fanfare reception flag is set. (Step S844). When the small hit fanfare reception flag is set (Y in step S844), the production control microcomputer 100 executes the contents of the stored fanfare command and the contents of the stored variation pattern (the time mission entry effect is executed). 2 rounds production (2 rounds production according to the time mission rush production, 2 rounds production according to the sudden probability variation / small hit common rush production) (Production) is selected (step S845). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the selected 2-round production (step S846). Then, the process timer is started (step S847), and the 2R effect time timer for measuring the execution time of the effect for 2 rounds is started (step S848). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit effect process (step S808) (step S849).

  When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in step S842 is not a big hit symbol but a big hit symbol (non-probable variation symbol, probability variation symbol, sudden probability variation symbol) (Y in step S850), the production control microcomputer 100 performs Then, it is confirmed whether or not the fanfare reception flag is set (step S851). When the fanfare reception flag is set (Y in step S851), the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the contents of the stored fanfare command and the contents of the stored variation pattern (whether the time mission entry effect has been executed or suddenly changed). Based on whether or not the rush effect has been executed, either a fanfare effect or a two-round effect (a two-round effect corresponding to a time mission rush effect, a two-round effect corresponding to a sudden change rush effect) is selected ( Step S852). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the selected fanfare effect or two-round effect (step S853). Then, the process timer is started (step S854), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S855).

  If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in step S850 is not a big hit symbol (non-probability variation symbol, probability variation symbol, or sudden probability variation symbol), that is, if it is an outlier symbol (N in step S850), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag (step S856). For example, when a flag corresponding to the decorative symbol stop designation command is set, such a flag is reset. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S857).

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open command has been received is set (step S901). The special winning opening open flag is set in the command analysis process (see step S645). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S903). For example, in the case of 15 rounds of big hit, the variable display device 9 displays a big hit display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters or characters indicating that a big hit has occurred. Further, for example, in the effect for two rounds, an effect for displaying special characters or characters is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 produces an in-round production (the number of rounds) based on the contents of the 15 round big prize opening open command. An effect for executing the corresponding round display is selected (step S907). When a command for opening a special prize opening for 2 rounds is received, there is no need to newly select an effect since an effect for 2 rounds is continuously executed during the round, but 2 for each round. When switching the effect included in the effect for round (for example, when switching the display screen of the effect for two rounds), the effect included in the effect for two rounds may be newly selected for each round. . Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S908), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S909). Then, the process timer is started (step S910), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S911).

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (step S805) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, first, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not a flag after opening the special prize opening indicating that a command after opening the special prize opening has been received is set (step S921). Note that the flag after the special winning opening is opened is set in the command analysis process (see step S645). When the flag for opening the big prize opening is not set (N in step S921), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S922), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S923). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like. Moreover, in the effect for two rounds, the effect which displays a special character, a character, etc. is performed. When the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit game (when the big lottery re-draw lottery execution flag is set), a predetermined round (for example, 7 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) A re-lottery effect is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S924), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S925). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S926).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S921 (Y in step S921), the production control microcomputer 100 performs interval production (according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the command after opening the big prize opening. An effect for performing interval display is selected (step S927). When a command is received after opening the grand prize opening for 2 rounds, there is no need to select a new production since there is no need to select a new production since 2 rounds of production have been executed. When switching the effect included in the effect for the second time (for example, when switching the display screen of the effect for two rounds), the effect included in the effect for the second round may be newly selected after the round. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the flag after the special winning opening is opened (step S928), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (step S929). Then, the process timer is started (step S930), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806) (step S931).

  100 and 101 are flowcharts showing round post-processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the ending flag is set (step S940). When the ending flag is not set (N in step S940), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open command is received is set. Confirmation is made (step S941). When the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S941), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S942), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S943).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S944), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S945). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S946).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S941), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether it is necessary to execute the re-lottery production during the big hit (during the round) ( Step S947). Specifically, when the big hit re-drawing execution flag or the big hit re-drawing effect execution flag is set (when it is a predetermined round when the re-lotting effect is executed), the re-lottery effect during the big hit Is determined to be necessary.

  When it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the big hit (Y in step S947), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the in-round effect for executing the re-lottery effect (step S948). Then, a re-lottery execution completion flag is set (step S949). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit (N in Step S947), the mid-round effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is selected (Step S950).

  Subsequently, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S951), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S952). Then, the process timer is started (step S953), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S954).

  When the ending reception flag is set in step S940 (Y in step S940), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect (step S955). Specifically, when the ending re-lottery execution flag is set or the ending re-lottery effect execution flag is set, or even if the big hit mid-re-lottery execution flag or the big-hit re-lottery effect execution flag is set, If the re-lottery execution completion flag indicating that the lottery effect was executed during the big hit (during the round) is not set (see step S949), it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect.

  When it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect (Y in step S955), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the ending effect for executing the re-lottery effect (step S956). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending effect (N in step S955), an ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is selected (step S957).

  Here, the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is made shorter than the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect. For example, the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect is 10 seconds, and the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is 3 seconds. By setting in this way, it is possible to avoid that the effect is unnecessarily executed for a long time when it is not necessary to notify the transition to the probability changing state.

  When selecting an ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect in step S957, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit with a flag (probable big hit decision flag, normal big hit decision flag). Choose different ending effects depending on whether you are a big hit or a normal big hit. For example, in the case of a probable big hit, an effect that informs the player that the game will shift to the probable state after the big hit is over (instead of notifying the promotion from a non-probable variable symbol to a probabilistic symbol like a re-lottery effect, Select the ending effect that executes the effect to notify the player that the transition to the probabilistic state is based on the normal, and in the case of a big jackpot, select the ending effect that performs the effect that informs the player that it will shift to the short time state after the big hit To do.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the ending reception flag (step S958), and selects process data corresponding to the ending effect (step S959). Then, the process timer is started (step S960), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process (step S807) (step S961).

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S971), and controls the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n. Execute (Step S972). For example, when the end of the big hit is displayed, or when a re-lottery effect is included in the ending effect, the re-lottery effect is executed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S973), and if the process timer has timed out, predetermined flags (probability big hit decision flag, normal big hit decision flag, Suddenly probable big hit decision flag, big hit re-lottery execution flag, ending re-lottery execution flag, etc.) are reset (step S974), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). Setting is made (step S975).

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the small hit effect process (step S808) in the effect control process. In the small hit effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S981), and controls the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n. Execute (step S982). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the 2R effect time timer (step S983).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the 2R production time timer has timed out (step S984). If not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S985). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S986). . Then, the process timer is started (step S987).

  If the 2R effect time timer has timed out (Y in step S984), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag (such as a small hit flag) (step S988), and sets the value of the effect control process flag. A value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) is set (step S989).

  Next, the effect aspect of the lottery symbol re-drawing effect executed in the variable display device 9 will be described. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a big lottery symbol re-lottering effect executed in the variable display device. The display effect as illustrated in FIG. 104 is executed based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560 by the effect control microcomputer 100. Note that the display example in FIG. 104 shows a case where the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending effect.

  In this embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives a variation pattern command other than the variation pattern command for both the normal big hit / probability big hit and the variation pattern command for sudden sudden variation big hit / small hit (in step S619). N, N of S620) Based on the received variation pattern command, the detachment, jackpot, and jackpot type are determined, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined in accordance with that (step S621, FIG. 44). On the other hand, when a variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit or sudden variation big / small hit is received (Y in step S619, Y in S620), it is based on the symbol information designation command received thereafter. Then, it is determined whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, and the stop symbol of the decorative design corresponding to that is determined (step S626, FIG. 63).

  However, even if the production control microcomputer 100 receives the fluctuation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit / sudden change suddenly, the pattern information designation command may be missed. is there. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 cannot determine whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, or cannot suddenly judge whether it is a probable big hit or a small hit, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It will be impossible. Therefore, when a variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probability big hit / sudden change suddenly / even for small hits is received, the symbol information designation command is missed (Y in step S629, S630). N of S631, N of S631), the stop symbol (temporarily determined symbol) of the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped is temporarily determined (step S632, FIG. 81). The provisionally determined symbol is a non-probable variable symbol when a normal big hit / probable variation big hit combined variation pattern command is received, and a sudden hit symbol is a small hit when a sudden variation variable / big hit combined variation pattern command is received. It is a design.

  In this way, when the variation pattern command for normal big hit / probable big hit is received, the non-probable symbol is determined after the non-probable symbol is derived and displayed at the end of the variation of the decorative symbol. If it is determined that is a probable big hit, then it is sufficient to promote the non-probable symbol to a probable symbol in the subsequent redraw lottery effect. If it is determined that it is, the probability variation symbol must be demoted to a non-probability variation symbol, and such an effect may discourage the player and reduce the interest of the game. In this embodiment, even if a small hit symbol is provisionally determined as a provisionally determined symbol, the re-lottery effect is not executed.

  In the example of FIG. 104, when a symbol information designation command is missed even though a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot is received, the non-probable variation symbol “444” is temporarily determined as a stop symbol for the decorative symbol. At the end of the decorative symbol variation, the non-probable variation symbol “444” is derived and displayed (temporary stop display). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the re-lottery effect should be executed based on the content of the fanfare command (steps S635 and S636), and when it is determined that the re-lottery effect should be executed. The probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect is determined (step S637), and the timing for executing the re-lottery effect is determined (steps S638 to S642). In the example of FIG. 104, it is assumed that the re-lottery effect is determined to be executed during the ending effect.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the big hit game based on the reception of the fanfare command, and performs the production of each round (production during the round) based on the reception of the command for opening the big prize opening. Execution is performed in order, and effects between the rounds (interval effects) are sequentially performed on the basis of the reception of the command after the special winning opening is opened. And the ending effect which alert | reports completion | finish of jackpot based on reception of an ending command is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 104, the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect. Specifically, re-variation is started in a state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbol, and then an effect that the probability variation symbol (“777” in the example of FIG. 104) is derived and displayed is executed. . Then, the player is informed that the state has entered (changed) into the probability variation state.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 are provided, and when the game control microcomputer 560 is determined to be out of place in the jackpot determination, the reach is determined. Variation pattern at the time of deviation (fluctuation pattern of variation numbers 5 to 41), variation pattern of normal variation (variation pattern of variation numbers 3 and 4) accompanied by a stop of chance eye A at the time of non-reach, and non-reach A fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuations (fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 1 and 2) without stopping the chance eye A at the time of loss (steps S211, S212, S207). When the big hit is determined to be a big hit, the fluctuation pattern with super reach at the big hit Among them, a variation pattern is determined from a plurality of variation patterns including variation patterns (variation patterns of variation numbers 63, 64, 84 to 86, 100, 113, 114) that accompany the chances A and B being stopped (step S205). To S207), control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S28). The effect control microcomputer 100 can specify a normal fluctuation pattern (variation patterns with fluctuation numbers 1 and 2) without stopping the chance eye A when the received fluctuation pattern command is out of reach. Then, out of the random numbers that determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the random symbol that is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol using the random symbol for determining the left symbol, the random number for determining the right symbol, and the random symbol for determining the middle symbol An outlier design is determined (steps S1001 to S1008), and a normal variation pattern (variation patterns of variation numbers 3 and 4) that accompanies the stop of the chance eye A when the received variation pattern command is out of reach can be identified If it is a command, chances are given without using the random symbol for determining the left symbol, random number for determining the right symbol, and random number for determining the middle symbol. Using the determined random number, determines the chance eyes A deriving displayed as the stop symbol decoration pattern (step S1000B, S1000C).

  According to such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 560 does not determine the chance, but the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the chance based on the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560. Therefore, various effects using a plurality of types of chances can be executed without increasing the control burden of the game control microcomputer 560. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a variation pattern command that can specify whether or not the chance is finally stopped (displayed at the end of variable display), and the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the variation pattern command to determine the chance. When the final stop is specified, the chance eye is determined using the chance eye determination random number, so that it is possible to perform an effect of finally stopping the chance eye without increasing the number of commands. That is, if the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to determine an opportunity, it is necessary to transmit a variation pattern command that can specify each of the determined types of chance eyes. If it is a configuration that determines only whether or not the chance is finally stopped, it is only necessary to transmit only the fluctuation pattern command that can specify that the chance is finally stopped (only the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 3 and 4). An effect of finally stopping the chance eye can be performed without increasing the number of commands of the variation pattern command.

  In the first embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a normal fluctuation pattern (variation patterns with fluctuation numbers 3 and 4) accompanied by a stop of the chance eye A when the fluctuation pattern command is out of reach. If the command is an identifiable command, the dummy effect is executed after the chance item A is derived and displayed. Therefore, when the chance item A is derived and displayed, the player is expected to generate a big hit. Can improve the interest of

  Further, in the first embodiment, among the variation patterns accompanied by super reach at the time of big hit, the variation patterns (variation numbers 63, 64, 84 to 86, 100, 113, 114) accompanied by the stop of chance eyes A and B. Since a plurality of types of patterns) are provided and the production control microcomputer 100 is configured to display different chance eyes (chance eyes A or B) based on the received fluctuation pattern command, the chance is displayed. It is possible to associate the kind of eyes with the super-reach production mode developed thereafter. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, when the chance eye A (for example, “2.3.4”) is stopped, it develops into super reach B, and the chance eye B (for example, “6. 7.8 ”) is stopped so that it develops into super reach D, so the type of chance eye (chance eyes A and B) and the super reach that develops thereafter (super reach B and D) It can be associated with the production mode. As a result, the reliability for the big hit can be made different depending on the type of the chance eye that is stopped in the middle of the fluctuation.

  For example, in the variation pattern determination table for loss that is used to determine the variation pattern when the game control microcomputer 560 is disconnected, the variation pattern of the super reach B is higher than the variation pattern of the super reach D. (Ie, the number of determination values set in the variation pattern of Super Reach B is relatively increased, and the number of determination values set in the variation pattern of Super Reach D is relatively small) In addition, in the big hit variation pattern determination table used by the game control microcomputer 560 to determine the variation pattern when the big hit, the variation pattern of the super reach D is more than the variation pattern of the super reach B. Set to be selected at a high rate (ie Super Reach D The number of judgment values that are set in the dynamic pattern relatively large, relatively reduced number of judgment values set for the variation pattern of the super reach B). In such a configuration, the reliability (possibility) of a big hit is higher when super reach D appears than when super reach B appears. As described above, when the chance eye A stops, it develops to super reach B, and when the chance eye B stops, it develops to super reach D. Therefore, when the chance eye B stops, the chance eye A stops. The reliability of jackpots is higher than when. Then, the player becomes interested in whether the chance chance stopped is the chance eye A or the chance eye B, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that the degree of reliability that develops into super reach may vary depending on whether the chance chance stopped is chance chance A or chance eye B. For example, in the above-described embodiment, as a variation pattern that accompanies the stop of the chance eye A, a variation pattern that does not develop into a super reach after the chance eye A stops (a dummy effect is executed) (a variation pattern with variation numbers 3 and 4). ) And a fluctuation pattern (variation patterns of fluctuation numbers 23, 63, 64, and 100) that develop into super reach after the chance eye A is stopped. Only the fluctuation patterns (variation patterns of fluctuation numbers 40, 41, 84 to 86, 113, 114) that develop into super reach after the stop were provided. However, the variation pattern with the chance B is also provided with a variation pattern that does not develop into super reach after the chance B stops (a dummy effect is executed). In the variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A, the selection rate of the variation pattern that does not develop to super reach is relatively higher than the variation pattern that evolves to super reach, and For the variation pattern that accompanies the stop, the selection rate of the variation pattern that develops to super reach is made relatively higher than the variation pattern that does not develop to super reach. According to such a configuration, the super reach at a higher rate when the chance eye B stops than when the chance eye A stops (the super reach that develops after the chance eyes A and B stop is different even in the same super reach). Super-reach may also be developed), and the player will be interested in whether the chance chance stopped is the chance eye A or the chance eye B. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the game control microcomputer 560 selects a variation pattern with a chance of stopping at a predetermined rate, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is designated by the variation pattern command. Since the chance eye is determined using the chance eye determination random number based on the stop of the chance eye, the appearance rate of the chance eye can be arbitrarily changed according to the game. For example, when it is desired to increase the appearance rate of the chance eyes A, it is only necessary to increase the distribution of the determination values with respect to the variation pattern accompanied by the stop of the chance eyes A. Temporarily, the production control microcomputer 100 does not determine the chance based on the fluctuation pattern, but the non-reach out-of-reach symbol determination random number (the left symbol determination random number, the right symbol determination random number shown in FIG. If the chance chances are uniquely determined using the symbol (random number for symbol determination), the number (types) of the predetermined chance eyes can be increased or the left can be increased if the appearance rate of the predetermined chance eyes is increased. In the table for determining the middle right symbol, it is necessary to adjust the distribution of the judgment values for the symbols constituting the chance eyes. In such a configuration, chance eyes can only appear at an appearance rate corresponding to the number of chance eyes, so for example, chance eyes with a small number of chance eyes but a high appearance rate cannot be set. Further, if the swing percentage is adjusted, there is a risk that the deviation symbol is biased (the symbols constituting the loss symbol are biased to a specific symbol). In addition, when the chance is determined using a random number for determining non-reach symbols, the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation without stopping the chance eye and the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with stopping the chance eye are the same fluctuation pattern (variation time). Therefore, if the dummy effect is performed after the chance eyes appear, the variation time is shifted, and the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 cannot synchronize the timing of the end of the variation. There is a fear. If an attempt is made to synchronize the timing of the end of change forcibly, the normal change time is reduced and the production becomes unnatural. On the other hand, the configuration in this embodiment does not have the above-mentioned drawbacks, and chances can appear at an arbitrary appearance rate that matches the game, and it varies depending on whether chances appear or not. As a result of being able to vary the time, it is possible to execute an interesting performance with a different variation time.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 are provided, and when the game control microcomputer 560 is determined to be out of place in the big hit determination, the reach lose game is achieved. A plurality of patterns including a variation pattern derived and displayed at the end of the variation (variation patterns of variation numbers 5 to 22 and 24 to 39) and a variation pattern of normal variation at the time of non-reach (variation patterns of variation numbers 1 and 2). A variation pattern is determined from among the variation patterns (steps S211, S212, and S207), and when it is determined that the big hit is determined by the big hit determination, the reach loser is displayed in the middle of the fluctuation and then the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. Variation patterns (variation numbers 44 to 62, 65 to 83, 88 to 99, 101 to 112, 116 to The variation pattern is determined from a plurality of variation patterns including 21 variation patterns (steps S205 to S207), and control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S205). Step S28). If the received variation pattern command is a command that can specify the variation pattern of the normal variation (the variation pattern of variation numbers 1 and 2) when the received variation pattern command is out of reach, then the effect control microcomputer 100 stops the decorative design. Out of the random numbers for determining the symbols, the left symbol determining random number, the right symbol determining random number, and the middle symbol determining random number are used to determine the disjoint symbol to be derived and displayed as the decorative symbol stop symbol (step S1001). ~ S1008) If the received fluctuation pattern command is a command that can specify a fluctuation pattern (variation pattern of fluctuation numbers 5 to 22, 24 to 39) derived and displayed at the end of fluctuation at the end of the reach loss, the above left pattern The reach loss score is determined without using the random number for determination, the random number for determining the right symbol, and the random number for determining the middle symbol (step S1011~S1018).

  According to such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 560 does not determine the reach loss score, and the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the reach loss score based on the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560. Therefore, it is possible to execute a variety of effects using a plurality of types of reach-out points (effects that develop from reach-out points to super reach) without increasing the control burden of the game control microcomputer 560. it can. In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a variation pattern command that can specify whether or not to reach the reach-losing event last (displayed at the end of variable display), and the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the variation pattern command to reach reach-losing. When it is specified that the outcome is to be finally stopped, the reach-losing outcome is determined. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of finally stopping the reach-losing outcome without increasing the number of commands. In other words, if the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to determine the reach loss score, it must transmit a variation pattern command that can identify each of the determined types of reach loss events. If the 560 determines whether or not to finally stop the reach losing outcome, it is only necessary to send a variation pattern command that can specify that the reach losing outcome is finally stopped, increasing the number of commands of the variation pattern command. It is possible to perform an effect of finally stopping the reach loss outcome without doing.

  In the first embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines a variation pattern (variation patterns of variation numbers 5 to 22 and 24 to 39) to be derived and displayed at the end of the variation, The design difference (difference) between the reach symbol and the middle symbol constituting the reach-losing outcome is also determined, and a variation pattern command capable of specifying the symbol difference is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S28). If the control microcomputer 100 is a command that can identify a variation pattern (variation patterns of variation numbers 5 to 22, 24 to 39) that is derived and displayed at the end of the variation, the extracted variation pattern command is extracted. The reach design selection table (H-1, H-2, H- ) Is used to determine the reach symbol (steps S1011 to S1013, S1015 to S1017), and the middle symbol (final stop symbol) is determined based on the determined reach symbol and the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command (step S1014). , S1019). According to such a configuration, the contents of the variation pattern and the symbol difference are simultaneously determined in the game control microcomputer 560, so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can execute an effect that matches the symbol difference. That is, the variation time changes depending on the difference between the reach symbol and the middle symbol, but the variation pattern command that can determine the symbol difference together with the content of the variation pattern in the game control microcomputer 560 and specify the determined symbol difference. Is transmitted, the effect control microcomputer 100 can execute the effect of the variation time corresponding to the symbol difference based on the variation pattern command. As a result, it is possible to reliably synchronize the control related to the variation of the decorative symbols in the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 displays a variation pattern (variation numbers 44 to 62, 65 to 83, 88 to 88) after displaying the reach lose game in the middle of the variation and deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol. 99, 101 to 112, and 116 to 121), the design difference (difference) between the reach design and the middle design constituting the reach-losing outcome is also determined, and the design difference can also be specified. The variation pattern command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S28), and the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the jackpot symbol after the received variation pattern command displays the reach lose mark in the middle of the variation. Variation patterns (variation numbers 44 to 62, 65 to 83, 88 to 99, 101 to 112, 116 to If the command can identify 21 fluctuation patterns), the jackpot symbol selection table (F-1 to H-3, F-7 to F-9, F-11 to F13) is determined according to the extracted jackpot symbol determining random number. , F-15 to F-17) are used to determine the jackpot symbol (in this case, the reach symbol constituting a part of the jackpot symbol) (steps S1031 to S1038, S1071 to S1078, S1101 to S1108), and the determined jackpot The middle symbol (final stop symbol) is determined based on the symbol (the reach symbol constituting a part of the jackpot symbol) and the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command (steps S1039, S1079, S1112, and S1139). ing. According to such a configuration, the contents of the variation pattern and the symbol difference are simultaneously determined in the game control microcomputer 560, so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can execute an effect that matches the symbol difference. That is, the variation time changes depending on the difference between the reach symbol and the middle symbol, but the variation pattern command that can determine the symbol difference together with the content of the variation pattern in the game control microcomputer 560 and specify the determined symbol difference. Is transmitted, the effect control microcomputer 100 can execute the effect of the variation time corresponding to the symbol difference based on the variation pattern command. As a result, it is possible to reliably synchronize the control related to the variation of the decorative symbols in the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when determining the middle symbol in the reach no-miss determination process, the middle symbol addition value determination table that does not become a chance symbol corresponding to the left and right symbols is selected using the chance prohibition rule table. (Step S1007), since the middle symbol is determined using the selected middle symbol addition value determination table (Step S1008), it is determined that the combination of the left middle right symbol does not appear as a chance. Sometimes, it is possible to reliably prevent a chance eye from being derived and displayed as a missed symbol.

  In addition, when determining the middle symbol, select the middle symbol addition value determination table that does not become a symbol similar to the chance (success probability similar symbol, small hit similar symbol) according to the left and right symbols using the table for chance eye prohibition rule Since it is configured to determine the middle symbol using the selected middle symbol addition value determination table, it is possible to reliably prevent the symbol similar to the chance symbol from being derived and displayed as an outlier symbol, It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the chance eye has been derived and displayed.

  Also, if the production control microcomputer 100 has missed the symbol information designation command even though it has received the variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpots (Y in step S629, N in step S630, S631). N), a non-probability variable symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed (step S632, FIG. 81), and the determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed (step S842). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not a big hit game is generated even if the production control microcomputer 100 misses the design information designation command, and the production control command related to the design of the decorative design. As a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an ending command indicating whether or not to shift to the probable change state after completion of the big hit game and whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect (steps S451 to S452), and the effect control microcomputer. When the computer 100 specifies execution of the re-lottery effect based on the content of the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560 (Y in step S955), the re-lottery effect is executed after the end of the big hit game (step S956). , S972). According to such a configuration, since the lottery effect may be executed until the next symbol variable display starts even after the end of the big hit game, the expectation for the transition to the probability change state is further increased. Can last for a period of time.

  In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 100 specifies that the promotion effect is not executed based on the content of the ending command (N in step S955), the ending effect that does not execute the promotion effect is executed after the big hit game is finished. (Steps S957 and S972). According to such a configuration, it can be seen that the promotion effect is not performed even after the end of the big hit game, and the player can easily grasp the game state after the end of the big hit game.

  In the above embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started, the non-probable variable symbol is always promoted to the probable variable symbol, but the non-probable variable symbol is not promoted to the probable variable symbol. A re-lottery effect may be executed. In this case, the same effect (re-variation of non-probabilistic variation symbol) as the case of promotion to probability variation symbol is executed until the middle of the re-lottery production, and then the probability variation big hit is used instead of notification of probability variation big hit (stop display of probability variation symbol) A notification to the effect that it will not become (stop display of uncertain variable symbols) will be performed. In addition, the execution time of the re-lottery effect that is not promoted to the probability variable symbol is set to be the same as the execution time (for example, 10 seconds) of the re-lottery effect that is promoted to the probability variable symbol.

  In addition, when transitioning to the probable state, the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is set to be shorter than the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect. When there is no need to notify the user, it can be avoided that the presentation is unnecessarily executed for a long time.

  Also, on condition that the game control microcomputer 560 is determined to be a big hit, a fanfare command indicating whether or not to shift to the promiscuous state and a big hit is transmitted (steps S366 and S367) for effect control. When the microcomputer 100 cannot receive the symbol information designation command (Y in step S635), a fanfare command (fanfare 2 indicating that the non-probable variation symbol is provisionally determined and that it is determined to shift to the probability variation state). (4 designation command) is received (Y in step S636), the promotion effect for informing that the state is to be shifted to the certain change state at a predetermined timing is executed (step S947 based on the re-lottery execution flag set in step S642). Or it is determined in step S955 that it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect. , Which is configured to perform the steps S948, S923 or steps S956, S972), it is possible to take the matching of the display results to be displayed on the gaming machine interior control state and variable display device 9.

  In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the promotion effect from the start to the end of the jackpot game, the promotion effect is performed from the end of the jackpot game until the start of the variable display of the symbol. It is prohibited to execute (when the re-lottery effect is performed during the big hit round, it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect in the ending in step S955 by setting the re-lottery execution completed flag in step S949. Therefore, it is possible to prevent useless control of executing the promotion effect again after executing the promotion effect.

  In the above embodiment, in the reach determination loss determination process, the middle symbol is determined by the difference with respect to the reach symbol in both cases of single reach and double reach. Alternatively, the middle symbol may be determined by the difference with respect to the left symbol or the right symbol in the middle and lower tiers.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the symbol information designation command is missed after suddenly receiving the variation pattern command for both the probability variation big hit / small hit, the small hit symbol is tentatively determined and displayed. (See step S684 in FIG. 81). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, a suddenly probable pattern may be tentatively determined and displayed. Further, the small hit symbol and the sudden probability variation symbol may be a common symbol. Also, when the time mission entry effect is executed (when the change pattern command of the change number 122 is received), the symbol “135”, when the sudden probability change / small hit common entry effect is executed (the change pattern of the change number 122) When the command is received), the symbol “357” is displayed, and when the sudden probability change entry effect is executed (when the variation pattern command of the variation number 124 is received), the symbol “531” is preliminarily matched to the effect. You may make it display.

  In the above embodiment, the execution timing of the re-lottery effect is set to be during the jackpot game (during the round) or during the ending effect after the jackpot game ends, but after the jackpot game is started, Any timing may be used as long as it is between the end and the start of a new change. For example, the fanfare effect may be in progress or the interval display may be in progress. And it may be comprised so that the execution timing of such a lottery effect may be designated with a symbol information designation command. In this case, the execution time of the fanfare effect, the display time of the interval display, and the like may be varied depending on the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect. Further, the number of re-drawing effects after the start of the big hit game may be once or three or more times.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the case where the symbol information designation command is missed, the non-probable variation symbol is determined and displayed, and whether or not the re-lottery effect is performed according to the content of the fanfare command received thereafter, and Although the execution timing has been confirmed (steps S636, S637, and S638), when the ending command is received, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the re-lottery effect is performed according to the content of the ending command. . Even with such a configuration, the control state inside the gaming machine and the display result displayed on the variable display device 9 can be matched. In this case, the processing of steps S635 to 637 in FIG. 43 may be executed when an ending command is received. In addition, when it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect when the ending command is received, the re-lottery effect must be executed during the ending effect, so the process of determining the execution timing of the re-lottery effect (steps S638 to S638). S642) is not necessary.

  In the above embodiment, the symbol information designation command is used to designate whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game and the execution timing. However, the symbol information designation command is used to execute the re-lottery effect. You may comprise so that presence / absence etc. may not be designated. With such a configuration, the types of symbol information designation commands can be reduced, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. In the case of such a configuration, the production control microcomputer 100 uniquely determines whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game and the execution timing. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect using a predetermined random number, and executes the re-lottery effect at a predetermined timing based on the determination result.

  In addition, with the symbol information designation command, the presence / absence and execution timing of the re-lottery effect after the big hit game are designated, and the production control microcomputer 100 independently determines whether or not the re-lottery effect after the big hit game is executed and the execution timing. It may be configured to determine. In such a configuration, it is specified that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending by the symbol information specifying command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 decides uniquely that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, and conversely The symbol information designation command specifies that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may uniquely determine that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the ending. In this case, if the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending and the re-lottery effect is executed even in the ending even though the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit and promoted to the probability variation pattern, the execution timing of the re-lottery effect cannot be matched. Therefore, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, processing for prohibiting the execution of the re-lottery effect during the ending is executed. Specifically, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, a flag indicating that is set, and based on the fact that the flag is set, it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending. Even if it is, it controls so that a re-lottery effect is not performed.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 designates only the promotion timing (fluctuating, big hit, or ending) with the variation pattern command or the symbol information designation command, and the production control microcomputer 100 always re-starts at the timing designated by the command. The execution control microcomputer 100 redraws the lottery effect (with promotion) with respect to the execution timing of other re-lottery effects before promotion and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect when not promoted (usually in the case of big hit). It may be determined by lottery whether or not to produce (no promotion).

  In addition, in the reach no-miss determination process, after the left symbol is determined using the left symbol selection table, an addition value (symbol difference, difference) to be added to the left symbol is determined using the right symbol addition value determination table, The right symbol is determined from the determined added value, and the added value (design difference, difference) to be added to the right symbol is determined using the middle symbol added value determination table, and the middle symbol is determined from the determined added value. (See steps S1001 to S1008). However, the present invention is not limited to the method of determining a symbol using such an added value, and the symbol may be determined without using an added value.

  For example, after the left symbol is determined using the left symbol selection table, the right symbol is determined using the right symbol selection table, and the middle symbol is determined using the middle symbol selection table. At this time, in order to prevent the left symbol and right symbol from becoming the same symbol and reach is not established, prepare multiple right symbol selection tables according to the left symbol that has already been determined. The determination value is not assigned to the same symbol as the left symbol already determined in the symbol selection table. In addition, it has already been decided so that the combination of the left, middle, and right symbols does not fall under the chance (actual chances A and B, chance for chance, chance chance for small hits). Judges whether the combination of the left symbol and the right symbol corresponds to the combination of the left symbol and the right symbol (chance eye prohibition pattern). Prepare a middle symbol selection table that does not assign judgment values to middle symbols that fall under the chance combination in combination with symbols, and determine the middle symbol using the middle symbol selection table .

  Also, in the reach determination process, the reach symbol is selected using the reach symbol selection table, and the middle symbol (the last when the reach is off) is determined based on the determined reach symbol and the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command. The middle symbols to be stopped and the middle symbols to be temporarily stopped before the development to super reach are determined (see steps S1011 to S1013, S1015 to S1017). However, in the reach determination loss determination process, first, the middle symbol is determined by the middle symbol selection table, and the reach symbol is determined based on the determined middle symbol and the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command. Good.

  In addition, it was configured to specify the reach difference between the reach design and the middle design using the variation pattern command, but this is not the only case. The design may be determined. For example, by determining a reach symbol using the reach symbol selection table, determining an addition value to be added to the determined reach symbol using the middle symbol addition value determination table, and adding the determined addition value to the reach symbol. Determine the middle symbol (the middle symbol that will be finally stopped when the reach is lost, or the middle symbol that will be temporarily stopped before the development of super reach). At this time, in the middle symbol addition value determination table, in the case of single reach, in order to prevent the reach symbol and the middle symbol from becoming the same symbol, the bonus value is 0. In the case of double reach, do not assign a judgment value to the addition values 0 and 2 (design differences 0 and -2 with respect to the later design) of the reach design. To.

  In the above case, if the production control microcomputer 100 uniquely determines the symbol difference (added value) between the reach symbol and the middle symbol based on the variation pattern command, the variation time may not match the stop timing of the middle symbol. There is. Therefore, in order to match the variation time with the stop timing of the middle symbol, the number of frames that have progressed from the time when reach is established until the middle symbol stops may be made constant. For example, when the symbol difference −1 is determined so that the number of progressing frames is always constant (for example, 11 frames), the symbol between the symbol and the reach symbol in which the reach (for example, normal reach) is established and the middle symbol becomes low speed is achieved. When the difference is -12 and the symbol difference +1 is determined, the symbol difference between the symbol where the reach is established and the middle symbol becomes slow and the reach symbol is -10. Further, instead of making the number of progressed frames from the time when reach is established until the middle symbol stops, the rate of change of the middle symbol after reach is established may be changed. For example, when reach (for example, normal reach) is established, the middle symbol changes at the time of reach from the symbol before the certain number of frames (for example, 11 frames). (When the number of progressing frames is large, the variation speed is slightly increased, and when the number of progressing frames is small, the variation frame number is decreased).

  In the above-described first embodiment, a middle symbol (medium symbol constituting a reach-losing game) temporarily stopped at the time of super reach development (at the end of normal reach) and a super reach end (variation) in the case of outlier reach The middle symbol that stops at the time of completion) (the middle symbol that constitutes the reach-losing outcome) is the same symbol, and this middle symbol is determined based on the variable pattern command. The middle symbol that temporarily stops sometimes and the middle symbol that stops when the super reach ends may be different. In this case, based on the fluctuation pattern command, either the middle symbol that stops temporarily during the development of super reach or the middle symbol that stops when super reach ends is determined, and the other symbol is added (design difference or difference). You may make it determine using. In this case as well, in order to avoid that the fluctuation time and the stop timing of the middle symbol do not match, the number of progressing frames until the middle symbol stops after the reach (normal reach or super reach) is established, It is preferable to change the fluctuation speed of the medium symbol after the reach (normal reach or super reach) is established.

  In the jackpot symbol determination process (first probability variation symbol determination processing, first non-probability variation symbol determination processing, second probability variation symbol determination processing, second non-probability variation symbol determination processing), a jackpot symbol selection table is used. The reach symbol (the reach symbol that constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol) is determined, and the middle symbol (temporarily stops before developing to super reach) based on the determined reach symbol and the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command. It was configured to determine the middle symbol). However, in the jackpot symbol determination process, first, the middle symbol is determined using the middle symbol selection table, and the reach symbol (part of the jackpot symbol) is determined based on the determined middle symbol and the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command. May be determined, or the reach design that is temporarily stopped during the development of the super reach that has nothing to do with the jackpot design.

  In addition, it was configured to specify the symbol difference between the reach symbol and the middle symbol with the variation pattern command. However, the present invention is not limited to such a case. You may make it determine a symbol. For example, by determining the reach symbol using the jackpot symbol selection table, determining the addition value to be added to the determined reach symbol using the medium symbol addition value determination table, and adding the determined addition value to the reach symbol. Determine the middle symbol (the middle symbol that is temporarily stopped before it evolves into super reach). At this time, in the middle symbol addition value determination table, in the case of single reach, in order to prevent the reach symbol and the middle symbol from becoming the same symbol, the bonus value is 0. In the case of double reach, do not assign a judgment value to the addition values 0 and 2 (design differences 0 and -2 with respect to the later design) of the reach design. To.

  Even in the above case, if the production control microcomputer 100 independently determines the difference (addition value) between the reach symbol and the middle symbol based on the variation pattern command, the variation time matches the stop timing of the middle symbol. There is a risk of disappearing. Therefore, in order to match the variation time with the stop timing of the middle symbol, the number of frames that have progressed from the time when reach is established until the middle symbol stops may be made constant. Further, the fluctuation speed of the medium symbol after reach is established may be changed.

  In the first embodiment, when a relief effect (relief loss effect, relief per effect) is executed, if a single reach is established, the symbol immediately before the reach symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped). If the double reach is established, the symbol two frames before the reach symbol was used as a temporary stop symbol, but the random number is used to determine the symbol that is an arbitrary number of frames before the reach symbol as a temporary stop symbol. You may do it.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the chance chance A on the production is the outcome relating to the symbols “1” to “4”, and the chance chance on the production is shown in FIG. B is the outcome of “5” to “8”, but is not limited to such a way of division, and may be different. For example, the outcome relating to “1”, “3”, “5” and “7” may be set as the chance item A, and the outcome relating to “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” may be set as the chance item B. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, since “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” are associated with animal characters, when the chance eye A stops, Since the character is moved to a super-reach and “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are associated with human characters, the human character moves when the chance eye B stops. You may make it develop into super reach.

  Further, it may be a completely different outcome from the chances shown in FIG. For example, when “3, 2 and 1” are aligned on the horizontal line, the chance may be taken. In this case, if the reach loss score of “2, 3, 2” is aligned in the upper row, the chance item “3, 2, 1” will be aligned in the lower row. The chance eyes are displayed, and the player may be misunderstood that the chance eyes are displayed. Therefore, in such a case, in the reach determination loss determination process, by adjusting the distribution of the judgment values in a predetermined table so that a specific reach is not established, a chance-of-chance rule is imposed even when the reach is lost. Is preferable.

  Further, after the chance chance (or chance chance for small hit) is temporarily stopped, it may be developed into super reach. In this case, for example, when the chance chance (or chance for small hit) is finally stopped and a dummy performance is performed, the chance suddenly becomes big (or small), and the chance of chance (or small hit) If the opportunity chance) is temporarily stopped and developed into a super reach, a big hit may be made (a case of a loss may be provided).

  In addition, random numbers may not be used when determining chances. In this case, for example, (1) one chance chance is set (for example, the chance chance for a surprise is “135”, the chance chance for a small hit is “357”, and the chance chance A in the production is “ 123 ”, and the chance item B in the production is set to“ 345 ”.) (2) The game control microcomputer 560 also determines the chance pattern (the variation pattern and the chance result have a one-to-one correspondence). A means such as associating) can be considered.

  In the above embodiment, the chance chance (the chance eye in the fluctuation pattern that does not develop into super reach even if the chance eye stops) is the chance eye A, but the chance eye B is the chance chance, Alternatively, chance eyes A and chance eyes B may be used as chance chance eyes.

  Also, different chance eye selection tables may be used depending on whether the game is out of the big hit, or the case where it develops to super reach and the case where it does not evolve. For example, among the chance eyes A, “123” is easily selected at the time of a big hit, and the chance eyes may be determined by using different chance eye selection tables set so as to be difficult to select at the time of loss. Good. Furthermore, the chance eye determination random numbers used when determining the chance eyes may be different random numbers when they are different from the case of the big hit, or when they develop into the super reach and when they do not evolve. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the reliability of the jackpot or change the reliability of the development of the super reach depending on the appearance of the chance. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in which outcome is the chance.

  In addition, the symbol difference between the middle symbol and the reach symbol at the time of Super Reach development was “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” specified by the variation pattern, but a fixed symbol difference (for example, “ +2 "). This symbol difference is the same as (a part of) the symbol difference at the time of deviating from normal.

  Further, the middle symbol is configured to stop once when it develops to super reach, but it may be configured to develop to super reach without stopping the middle symbol. For example, the middle symbol may be changed at a low speed in normal reach, and the middle symbol may be changed at a high speed at the timing of development to super reach.

  “Reach non-specific display result that is a combination of identification information that is reach and does not result in specific display result is derived and displayed at the end of variable display” means that reach losing output is derived and displayed at the end of normal reach This includes not only the case where the change is made, but also the case where the change is ended by deriving and displaying the reach lose point at the end of the super reach. Also, “Display non-specific reach results in the middle of variable display and then derive specific display results” means that you will display a reach-losing outcome at the end of normal reach and then develop into a super reach to display a jackpot symbol Not only in the case of derivation display, but also in the case of displaying the losing effect at the end of normal reach and then performing the remedy effect to derive and display the jackpot symbol. Is also included in order to derive and display the jackpot symbol.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, in the reach no-miss determination process, it is determined whether the left and right symbols correspond to the chance prohibition pattern, and if so, the middle symbol addition value determination table for the chance prohibition pattern is used. The middle symbol addition value was determined to determine the middle symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the middle symbol is determined without determining whether the left and right symbols correspond to the chance-forbidden pattern, and the combination of the determined missing symbols corresponds to the chance symbol. May be configured to be changed.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reachless losing determination processing according to the second embodiment. In the reach-less losing determination process according to the second embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 first performs a change accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A based on the contents of the received change pattern command (the change pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether it is a pattern (step S1200). If the variation pattern is not accompanied by the stop of the chance eye A (N in step S1200), that is, if the variation pattern is variation number 1, 2, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the left symbol determination random number (first symbol). A random number and a first identification information random number are extracted (step S1201). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the left symbol of the off symbol using the left symbol selection table (FIG. 46) according to the extracted random number value (step S1202).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a right symbol determining random number (second symbol random number, second identification information random number) (step S1203). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the right symbol addition value determination table (FIG. 47) corresponding to the left symbol determined in step S1202 (step S1204). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the added value of the right symbol relative to the left symbol using the selected right symbol added value determination table according to the extracted random number value, and determines the right symbol corresponding to the added value. Store (step S1205).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (third symbol random number, third identification information random number) (step S1206). Then, in accordance with the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a middle symbol addition value for the right symbol using a middle symbol addition value determination table (not shown), and responds to the determined addition value. The middle symbol is determined and stored (step S1207).

  Unlike the middle symbol addition value determination table shown in FIG. 51, the middle symbol addition value determination table used at this time is not a table that takes into account the chance forbidden pattern. That is, in FIG. 51, only the table associated with “LR0” is used, and the table associated with the chance prohibition pattern “LR1” or the like is not used.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether the left middle right symbol determined in steps S1202, S1205, and S1207 corresponds to the chance eye (step S1208). If the left middle right symbol corresponds to the chance eye (Y in step S1208), the production control microcomputer 100 adds +1 to the right symbol, changes it, and stores it (step S1209). For example, if the left middle right symbol determined first is “123” of the chance eye 33C, the symbol “*” is changed by adding +1 to the right symbol “3”, and the symbol is not the chance eye. To do. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a chance eye from being derived and displayed as a missed symbol. Therefore, it is possible to avoid misleading the player that the chance is displayed.

  In step S1209, the right symbol is incremented by +1 when the chance hits, but the left symbol or middle symbol may be incremented by +1. In addition, even if a predetermined symbol is added by +1, there is a possibility that it falls under the chance again. In this case, it is determined whether it falls under the chance again, and if it falls, the predetermined symbol is incremented by 1. It is preferable to do so. Furthermore, when it is determined in step S1208 that it corresponds to the chance eye, it may be determined by lottery using a random number as to which of the left, middle, and right symbols is added by +1. In addition, the number of addition values may be determined by lottery using random numbers. According to such a configuration, the randomness of the off symbol can be improved.

  Note that the processing in steps S1210 and S1211 in FIG. 105 is the same as the processing in steps S1000B and S1000C in FIG.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
FIG. 106 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board, the sound / lamp control board, and the display control board in the third embodiment. In the board configuration shown in FIG. 10, the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the production control board 80 controls the display state of the variable display device 9, and outputs control signals to the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70. Thus, the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27 are controlled. However, in the board configuration shown in FIG. 106, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A mounted on the sound / lamp control board 80A controls the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27, and the display control board 80B. The display control microcomputer 100 </ b> B is configured to control the display state of the variable display device 9. Then, a control command (hereinafter, sound / lamp control command) from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 is first transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A of the sound / lamp control board 80A. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A transmits a control command (hereinafter referred to as a display control command) corresponding to the sound / lamp control command received to the display control microcomputer 100B of the display control board 80B. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A controls the lighting / extinction of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27 based on the sound / lamp control command from the game control microcomputer 560. The display control microcomputer 100B The display state of the variable display device 9 is controlled based on a display control command from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing main sound / lamp control processing executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer according to the third embodiment. When the power is turned on, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A starts executing the main process. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control processing (step S711). Thereafter, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S712). When a timer interrupt occurs, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A clears the flag (step S713) and executes the following sound / lamp control process.

  In the sound / lamp control process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A first analyzes the received effect control command (sound / lamp side command analysis process: step S714). Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A performs a sound / lamp control process (step S715). In the sound / lamp control process, the process corresponding to the current control state is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and various lamps are turned on / off, the sound output of the speaker 27 is controlled, and the like. Further, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers is executed (step S716). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S712.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing sound / lamp-side command analysis processing (step S714) in the sound / lamp control main processing. The sound / lamp control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the sound / lamp side command analysis processing, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S721). If a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the reception command is read from the command reception buffer (step S722).

  If the received sound / lamp control command is a control command (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 807B (H)) designating a variation pattern (step S723), the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A The command EXT data is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S724), and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S725). Then, control for transmitting a display control command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control microcomputer 100B is executed (step S726).

  If the received sound / lamp control command is a control command (design information designation command: 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H)) designating design information (step S727), the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A Control for transmitting a display control command corresponding to the symbol information to the display control microcomputer 100B is executed (step S728). If the received sound / lamp control command is another control command, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A performs control to transmit a display control command corresponding to the other command to the display control microcomputer 100B. This is executed (step S729).

  When the display control microcomputer 100B receives a display control command from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A, the same processing as the processing of the effect control means described in each of the above embodiments based on the received command. Execute. That is, the processing in the case where “production control” in FIGS. 40 to 104 is replaced with “display control” is executed.

  In the first and second embodiments, a presentation control board 80, an audio output board 70, and a lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the presentation device is mounted. In the third embodiment, a sound / lamp is provided. Although the control board 80A and the display control board 80B are provided, a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one board. Furthermore, when the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted on two substrates, the way of dividing the circuit for controlling the effect device mounted on each substrate is arbitrary. For example, a first effect control board (display / lamp control board) on which a variable display device 9 and a circuit for controlling a lamp and the like are mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (such as the speaker 27) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards. In the third embodiment, the sound / lamp control board 80A transmits the display control command corresponding to the sound / lamp control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the display control board 80B. May be the same data as the sound / lamp control command, or may be changed to a simplified command and transmitted as a display control command. In addition, when two boards, the first effect control board and the second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board, A command is transmitted as it is from the second effect control board to the first effect control board, or is transmitted after processing (for example, changing the command form or contents, simplifying, or selecting only necessary commands). You may comprise.

  The big hit symbol and the small hit symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8 may be a common symbol (for example, “7”). In this way, the player does not know whether the big hit or the small hit, the big hit type, or the like by the symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8. Therefore, the expectation for the transition to the probable change state in the re-lottery effect is not impaired. Also, there is no loss of expectation for sudden or big hits.

  In addition, as a special symbol stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8, the symbol for 15 rounds (probable big hit, non-probable big hit) may be a common big hit symbol. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the probability change big hit or the non-probability big hit is based on the symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8. In addition, as a special symbol stop symbol displayed on the special symbol indicator 8, the symbol at the time of two rounds (suddenly probable big hit, small hit) may be a common symbol. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the probability sudden hit or the big hit is suddenly determined by the symbols displayed on the special symbol display 8.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the variation pattern command is a dedicated variation pattern command (a variation pattern command that is not a regular big hit / probable variation big hit combined variation pattern command), the decoration pattern is decorated based on the dedicated variation pattern command. It was comprised so that the stop symbol of a symbol might be determined. However, it is configured to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol by determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the symbol information specifying command at the normal time and referring to the contents of the variation pattern command only when the symbol information specifying command is missed. May be.

  In addition, when the variation pattern command is a dedicated variation pattern command, the decorative symbol stop symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command regardless of whether the symbol information designation command is missed or not. If the design information designation command cannot be received when any of the variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern command dedicated to normal jackpot, or the variation pattern command dedicated to outliers is received, the variation pattern The decoration symbol may be determined based on the content of the command.

  Alternatively, the decorative symbol stop symbol may always be determined based only on the variation pattern command. That is, the variation pattern commands are all dedicated variation patterns, and the variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit may not be provided. Alternatively, the decorative symbol stop symbol may always be determined based only on the symbol information designation command. In other words, the variation pattern command may be determined according to the content of the symbol information designation command as to the stop symbol of the decoration symbol only by designating the variation pattern (variation time).

  In each of the above embodiments, the variation pattern command and the symbol information designation command are separated, but a single command may be used. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit one command indicating the variation pattern and the symbol information (disconnected, normal big hit, or probable big hit) to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of symbol variation. Good. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the symbol based on the common command, specifies the variation pattern (including the variation time), and further determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  In each of the above embodiments, the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect during symbol variation is specified by the variation pattern command (a variation pattern with a re-lottery effect during symbol variation is distinguished from a variation pattern without a re-lottery effect). At the same time, the symbol information designation command specified the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect (promotion effect). However, the symbol information designation command is not limited to this configuration. Without specifying whether or not a re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game, with the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect during the symbol variation with the change pattern command, whether or not the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game and the re-lottery effect (promotion effect) The execution timing may be designated.

  In addition, in the variation pattern command, the disparity, the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit are specified (the variation pattern is distinguished for each outlier, the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit), and the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect during the symbol variation is designated, and the symbol information is designated. In the command, a stop symbol, a non-probable variation symbol, a probability variation symbol, a sudden probability variation symbol, or a small hit symbol may be designated as a stop symbol at the time of a variable stop. When the probability variation big hit (execution of re-lottery effect during big hit) or probability variation big hit (execution of re-lottery effect during ending) is determined in step S62, the probability variable big hit is determined internally, Since the stop symbol is a non-probable variable symbol, a symbol information specifying command for specifying the non-probable variable symbol is transmitted. In the case of such a command designation method, the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes whether it is a big hit or a big hit type (ordinary big hit or a probable big hit) based on the variation pattern command, and Based on the information designation command, it is recognized whether the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop should be an off symbol, a non-probable variable symbol, a probabilistic variable symbol, a sudden probability variable symbol, or a small hit symbol symbol. In the case of a big hit (excluding a sudden probability change big hit), the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts based on the variation pattern command and the symbol information designation command. For example, if the symbol information designation command recognizes that the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop is an uncertain variable symbol, and if the variable pattern command recognizes a probable bonus symbol, it must be promoted to a probable bonus symbol with a re-lottery effect after the jackpot game starts. Judge that there is.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the re-draw lottery effect after the big hit game, after the symbols are re-variable, the probability variation symbols are derived and displayed. You may make it alert | report to a player that it was a probable big hit by displaying a character (it transfers to a probable change state). In this case, it is determined in step S625E, S692, S1111 that “probability change” is displayed instead of determining the probability change symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the big hit symbol is a flat eye such as “1 · 1 · 1”, but may be a combination of symbols other than the blue eye. For example, a big hit may be made when the left, middle and right symbols on the active line are aligned with “Large, Win, Ri”. In that case, it becomes reach when a part of the big hit symbol is arranged as the left and right symbols on the effective line.

  In each of the above embodiments, the number of fluctuations after the end of the normal jackpot is counted at the start of the fluctuation, and the hourly flag is reset when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number. It is also possible to count the number of fluctuations after the completion and reset the time reduction flag when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the re-drawing effect during the change is executed, the change pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit is always transmitted. That is, all of the normal big hit / probable big hit variation patterns included a redrawing effect during variation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the re-lottery effect during the fluctuation may be included in the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the probable big hit or the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the normal big hit. In addition, there may be a variation pattern that does not include the re-drawing effect during variation as the variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the fluctuation pattern command for designating the fluctuation pattern at the time of 15 rounds of big hit is a fluctuation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit, a fluctuation pattern command dedicated to positive big hit, and a fluctuation dedicated to normal big hit. Although a pattern command is provided, it is possible to use only a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot and a variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot (no variation pattern command dedicated to regular jackpot).

  In each of the embodiments described above, when the chance eyes A (or chance eyes B) are continuously stopped and displayed, there is a high possibility that the chance eyes A will be a big hit according to the number of times the chance eyes A are stopped and displayed. You may make it develop into super reach. It should be noted that continuously displaying the chance eyes A is called pseudo continuous notice or pseudo continuous fluctuation. For example, if chance item A is stopped and displayed once, it will be developed into super reach A (super reach with a relatively low probability of big hit), and chance item A will be stopped and displayed twice in succession (specifically The chance eye A was stopped and displayed from the normal fluctuation, and the chance eye A was stopped and displayed again from the normal fluctuation). In this case, it may be developed to super reach C, and when chance eyes A are stopped and displayed four times in succession, it may be developed to super reach D (super reach with the highest possibility of big hit). Further, in addition to the case where the chance B (or chance A) is stopped and displayed and then developed into super reach (super reach D in the embodiment), it is normally stopped due to normal fluctuations (without reaching reach). There may be provided a case of developing to super reach (for example, super reach D) when the off symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of developing to the super reach after the display of the chance eye A or the chance eye B, normal fluctuation is performed after the chance eye A or the chance eye B is stopped and displayed, and then the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped in order. It may be a case of developing to a super reach, or a case of developing directly to a super reach directly (suddenly) without performing normal fluctuation after the chance item A or the chance item B is stopped and displayed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the chance eyes to be displayed with the variation pattern command, and causes the effect control microcomputer 100 to display the chance eyes. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the presentation control microcomputer 100 receives a specific fluctuation pattern command (for example, a fluctuation pattern command with a super reach D), for example. It is determined whether or not to display, and when it is determined to display the chance eye, a predetermined chance eye may be selected and displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the probability change non-notification effect (common to probability change state / normal game state is common) that does not notify the player whether or not the game state after the end of 15 rounds of jackpot has shifted to the probability change state (or the probability change short state). 15 rounds of productions, or productions common to short-time and short-time conditions; for example, productions that do not know whether or not they are in a certain state without changing the background, etc. You may make it perform after the fluctuation | variation after the end of jackpot is started. When such a probabilistic non-notification effect is executed, regardless of the probable big hit or non-probable big hit, the big hit symbol is a non-probable variable symbol (or the probabilistic symbol and the non-probable variable symbol are common), and promoted when performing a re-lottery effect. Avoid directing.

  In each of the above embodiments, even if the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed at the end of symbol variation, the lottery effect (for example, the probability variation symbol is re-variable and then the probability variation symbol is stopped again after starting the big hit game) An effect to be displayed or an effect to display the characters “probability change” may be executed. In this case, prior to the re-lottery effect, the player is informed that the winning symbol will be a promising big hit, so the re-lottery effect is not a promotion effect.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are used as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols. However, if the number of symbols is three or more, the number of symbols to be displayed is Any number is acceptable. For example, the display screen of the variable display device 9 is divided into a leftmost display area, a second display area from the left, a third display area from the left, and a rightmost display area. A decorative design may be displayed. In this configuration, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are the four symbols of the leftmost symbol, the second symbol from the left, the third symbol of the left symbol, and the rightmost symbol. In this case, it may be a big hit when all four symbols are aligned, or may be a big hit if three of the four symbols are aligned. Alternatively, the display screen of the variable display device 9 may be divided into a 3 × 3 matrix display area (decorative symbol display area or square) and the ornamental symbols may be displayed in the respective display areas. In this configuration, the decorative symbol stop symbols are the upper left column symbol, the upper middle column symbol, the upper right column symbol, the middle left column symbol, the middle middle column symbol, the middle middle column symbol, the lower right column symbol, and the lower left column. Nine symbols, the lower middle row of symbols, and the lower right row of symbols. In this case, to a predetermined effective line (for example, upper line, middle line, lower line, left column line, middle column line, right column line, lower right diagonal line, upper right diagonal line) You may make it a big hit when three specific symbols gather.

  In addition, the structure of each Embodiment 1-3 and the structure of the modification of each Embodiment 1-3 can be combined suitably, and can be applied.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the above embodiment can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when the stop symbol of the special symbol variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning becomes the predetermined symbol. A pachinko machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric game that is released based on a start prize, or a start prize The present invention can be applied even to a pachinko gaming machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when a winning is given to a predetermined electric combination that is released when a stop symbol of a variably displayed symbol becomes a predetermined symbol combination . Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game.

  The present invention can be applied to a game such as a pachinko game machine, and can be applied to a game of a gaming machine in which the game state can be controlled to a special game state such as a probability change state.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement pattern of a reach design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement pattern of a jackpot symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes A on production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes B on production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes (sudden probability variation pattern) for sudden probability variation big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes for small hits (small hit symbol). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution rate of the determination value in a jackpot determination table, and the distribution rate of the determination value in a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process after a special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process after a special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration symbol command control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command set process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command transmission process. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when a two-round big hit game and a small hit game are executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st decoration design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of reach non-losing determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for left symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows a right symbol addition value determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a chance eye prohibition pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a chance eye prohibition pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance prohibitions. It is explanatory drawing which shows a middle symbol addition value determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes A selection. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a reach determination loss determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for common reach symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach design table for singles. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach design selection table for doubles. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes B selection. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st non-probable variable symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sudden probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol selection table for accuracies. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd decoration design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd non-probability variable symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd non-probability variable symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd probability variation design determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot (promotion during jackpot promotion), probability variation jackpot (ending promotion)). It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (probability straight hit). It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot symbol selection table for singles (a normal jackpot, a probability variation jackpot (promotion during jackpot promotion), a probability variation jackpot (ending promotion)). It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit symbol selection table for singles (probability straight hit). It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot symbol selection table for singles (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection for a double tip (normal hit, probable big hit (promotion during big hit), probable big hit (ending promotion)). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hits symbol selection for double tip hits (probability straight hit). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection for double hits (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection for double after hits (normal hit, probable big hit (promotion during big hit), probable big hit (ending promotion)). It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit symbol selection table (probability straight hit) for double after hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for double hits jackpot symbol selection (re-lottery promotion). It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol selection table for small hits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a temporary determination symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 3rd probability variation design determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the change timing in the case of developing from a chance eye stop to super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of the fluctuation pattern in the case of developing from a chance eye stop to a super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of a fluctuation pattern when not developing from a chance eye stop to a super reach. It is a timing chart which shows the change timing in case a reach lose spot is stopped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | generation aspect of the normal reach in the case of developing from a reach losing spot stop to a super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of the super reach (reach 1-1) in the case of developing from a reach lose spot stop to a super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of the super reach (reach 1-2) in the case of developing from a reach lose spot stop to a super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of a super reach (reach 2-1) in the case of developing from a reach lose spot stop to a super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of the super reach (reach 2-2) in the case of developing from a reach lose spot stop to a super reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the re-lottery effect of the jackpot symbol performed in a variable display apparatus. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reach-less loss determination processing according to the second embodiment. 10 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of a relay board, a sound / lamp control board, and a display control board in Embodiment 3. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a main sound / lamp control process executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing sound / lamp-side command analysis processing in the third embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Special symbol display 9 Variable display device 14 Start winning opening 15 Variable winning ball device 31 Main board 80 Production control board 80A Sound / lamp control board 80B Display control board 100 Production control microcomputer 100A Sound / lamp control Microcomputer 100B Microcomputer for display control 560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (4)

A variable display device having a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified, and a specific display result of a specific combination out of a combination of identification information is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display After the specific gaming state is ended when the special display state of the special combination of the specific display results is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Compared to the normal state, the display result of the variable display is shifted to the special game state in which the combination of identification information is likely to be the specific display result, and the special display result of the special combination is derived from the combination of the identification information that does not become reach. When the game state is shifted to a special game state in which a game value lower than the specific game state can be given to the player when displayed Game wherein there is the case not to migrate special display results derived displayed despite the special gaming state, when the transition to the special gaming state to shift to the special game state after the special gaming state is terminated Machine,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means for controlling the display state of the variable display device,
The game control means includes
Predetermining means for determining whether to shift to the specific gaming state, whether to shift to the special gaming state, and whether to shift to the special gaming state before derivation display of the display result;
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of identification information;
A pre-determined command transmitting unit that transmits a pre-determined command capable of specifying the determination result of the pre-determining unit and the determination result of the variable display pattern determining unit;
The production control means includes
Numerical value updating means for updating numerical values of a plurality of types of identification information random numbers for determining a combination of identification information;
Numerical value extraction means for extracting a numerical value of the identification information random number from the numerical value update means at a predetermined time;
Based on the predetermined command, a combination of identification information derived and displayed as a display result on the plurality of variable display units in the variable display device is used by using the numerical value of the identification information random number extracted by the numerical value extraction means. Identification information determining means for determining from among a plurality of types,
The variable display pattern determining means includes
Reach variable display pattern for deriving and displaying a combination of identification information to be reached when the variable display is ended when reach is determined not to shift to the specific game state and the special game state by the pre-determining means, and reach is not performed Of the combination of identification information, the first special variable display pattern that derives and displays the special display result at the end of variable display and the combination of identification information that does not reach reach other than the special display result is derived and displayed at the end of variable display. A variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a non-reach variable display pattern,
A first special variable display pattern for deriving and displaying the special display result at the end of the variable display among combinations of identification information that do not reach when the predetermination means determines to shift to the special gaming state; A variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns,
A second special variable display pattern for deriving and displaying the specific display result after temporarily displaying the special display result in the middle of variable display when it is determined by the pre-determining means to shift to the specific gaming state A variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including
The identification information determining means includes
If the pre-determined command is a command that can identify the non-reach variable display pattern, determine a combination of identification information derived and displayed as a display result using a specific random number of the identification information random number,
If the predetermined command is a command that can specify the first special variable display pattern, a combination of identification information derived and displayed as a display result without using the specific random number of the identification information random numbers Decide on special display results ,
The predetermined command transmission means includes
Variable display command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display command capable of specifying the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means;
Display result command transmission means for transmitting a display result command indicating the determination result by the prior determination means,
The variable display command transmission means displays, as the variable display command, a non-specific variable display command capable of specifying a variable display pattern for displaying a non-specific display result indicating that the specific gaming state is not controlled, and the special display result. A special variable display command that can specify a variable display pattern to be displayed, a non-special variable display command that can specify a variable display pattern that displays the non-special display result that is the specific display result but not the special display result, and the special display result Alternatively, a specific variable display command capable of specifying a common variable display pattern for displaying the non-special display result is transmitted,
The identification information determining means includes
When the non-specific variable display command, the special variable display command, or the non-special variable display command is received, the identification information is based on the received variable display command regardless of whether the display result command is received or not. Decide
When the specific variable display command is received and the display result command is received, identification information that is the special display result or the non-special display result is determined based on the received display result command, and the display result command The game machine is characterized by temporarily determining the identification information that is the non-special display result when it cannot be received . Equipped with a variable display device having a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information arranged in a predetermined order so that each can be identified, and the variable display device can derive and display a combination of identification information A plurality of lines are set in advance, and as a display result of variable display, a specific display result of a specific combination among the combinations of identification information is derived and displayed on the effective line, and a transition is made to a specific game state advantageous to the player , and variable display Display result of variable display as compared to the case of normal state after the end of the specific gaming state when a special display result of a special combination of the specific display results is derived and displayed on the active line the combination of the identification information is a gaming machine Ru is shifted to the special game state prone to the specific display as a result,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means for controlling the display state of the variable display device,
The game control means includes
Predetermining means for determining whether to shift to the specific gaming state and whether to shift to the special gaming state before derivation display of the display result;
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of identification information;
A pre-determined command transmitting unit that transmits a pre-determined command capable of specifying the determination result of the pre-determining unit and the determination result of the variable display pattern determining unit;
The production control means includes
Numerical value updating means for updating numerical values of a plurality of types of identification information random numbers for determining a combination of identification information;
Numerical value extraction means for extracting a numerical value of the identification information random number from the numerical value update means at a predetermined time;
Based on the predetermined command, a combination of identification information derived and displayed as a display result on the plurality of variable display units in the variable display device is used by using the numerical value of the identification information random number extracted by the numerical value extraction means. Identification information determining means for determining from among a plurality of types,
The variable display pattern determining means includes
When it is decided not to shift to the specific gaming state by the pre-determining means, a reach variable display pattern for deriving and displaying a combination of identification information to be reached at the end of variable display and a combination of identification information not to reach Of these combinations, the first special variable display pattern for deriving and displaying the special display result of the special combination at the end of the variable display, and the non-reach for deriving and displaying other than the special display result of the combination of identification information that does not reach reach at the end of the variable display A variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a variable display pattern,
A second special variable display pattern for deriving and displaying the specific display result after temporarily displaying the special display result in the middle of variable display when it is determined by the pre-determining means to shift to the specific gaming state A variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including
The identification information determining means includes
If the predetermined command is a command that can specify the non-reach variable display pattern, a specific combination of identification information random numbers is selected so that a combination of identification information does not become the special display result in the plurality of valid lines. Determine the combination of identification information to be derived and displayed as a display result using random numbers,
If the pre-determined command is a command that can specify the reach variable display pattern, a combination of identification information does not become the special display result in an effective line other than a specific effective line of the plurality of effective lines. , Determine a combination of identification information to reach and display as a display result on the specific active line,
If the predetermined command is a command that can specify the first special variable display pattern, a combination of identification information derived and displayed as a display result without using the specific random number of the identification information random numbers Decide on special display results ,
The predetermined command transmission means includes
Variable display command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display command capable of specifying the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means;
Display result command transmission means for transmitting a display result command indicating the determination result by the prior determination means,
The variable display command transmission means displays, as the variable display command, a non-specific variable display command capable of specifying a variable display pattern for displaying a non-specific display result indicating that the specific gaming state is not controlled, and the special display result. A special variable display command that can specify a variable display pattern to be displayed, a non-special variable display command that can specify a variable display pattern that displays the non-special display result that is the specific display result but not the special display result, and the special display result Alternatively, a specific variable display command capable of specifying a common variable display pattern for displaying the non-special display result is transmitted,
The identification information determining means includes
When the non-specific variable display command, the special variable display command, or the non-special variable display command is received, the identification information is based on the received variable display command regardless of whether the display result command is received or not. Decide
When the specific variable display command is received and the display result command is received, identification information that is the special display result or the non-special display result is determined based on the received display result command, and the display result command The game machine is characterized by temporarily determining the identification information that is the non-special display result when it cannot be received . The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein if the predetermined command is a command that can specify the first special variable display pattern, the effect control means executes the specific effect after deriving and displaying the special display result. A plurality of second special variable display patterns are provided,
The presentation control means temporarily stops and displays a special display result that varies depending on which second special variable display pattern is a predetermined command in the middle of variable display. Gaming machine.

Images